DCR-VX2000E - Camcorder SONY - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL DCR-VX2000E SONY

Digital Video Camera Recorder Operating Instructions Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and retain it for future reference.

Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Digital Handycam camcorder. With your Digital Handycam, you can capture life’s precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Digital Handycam is loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.

Поздpaвляeм Bac c пpиобpeтeниeм видeокaмepы Digital Handycam фиpмы Sony. C помощью видeокaмepы Digital Handycam можно зaпeчaтлeть доpогиe Baм мгновeния жизни c пpeвоcxодным кaчecтвом изобpaжeния и звyкa. Bидeокaмepa Digital Handycam оcнaщeнa ycовepшeнcтвовaнными фyнкциями, но в то жe вpeмя ee очeнь лeгко иcпользовaть. Bcкоpe Bы бyдeтe cоздaвaть ceмeйныe видeопpогpaммы, котоpыми cможeтe нacлaждaтьcя в поcлeдyющиe годы.

WARNING To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

NOTICE ON THE SUPPLIED AC POWER ADAPTOR FOR CUSTOMERS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM A moulded plug complying with BS1363 is fitted to this equipment for your safety and convenience. Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA or BSI to BS 1362 (i.e., marked with or mark) must be used. If the plug supplied with this equipment has a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never use the plug without the fuse cover. If you should lose the fuse cover, please contact your nearest Sony service station.

For the customers in Europe ATTENTION The electromagnetic fields at the specific frequencies may influence the picture and sound of this digital camcorder.

For the Customers in Germany Directive: EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. 92/31/EEC This equipment complies with the EMC regulations when used under the following circumstances: • Residential area • Business district • Light-industry district (This equipment complies with the EMC standard regulations EN55022 Class B.)

Table of contents Checking supplied accessories 5 Quick Start Guide 6 Getting started Using this manual 10 Step 1 Preparing the power supply 13 Step 2 Inserting a cassette 20 Recording – Basics Recording a picture 22 Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) 32 Using the spot light function 33 Self-timer recording 34 Checking the recording – END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review 36 Playback – Basics Playing back a tape 38 Viewing the recording on TV 44 Advanced Recording Operations Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording 46 Shooting with all the pixels – PROG. SCAN 50 Using the guide frame 52 Using the wide mode 53 Using the fader function 54 Using special effects – Picture effect 56 Using special effects – Digital effect 58 Shooting with manual adjustment 61 Adjusting the white balance 70 Adjusting recording level manually – Sound recording level 73 Presetting the adjustment for picture quality – Custom preset 75 Using the PROGRAM AE function 77 Focusing manually 81 Interval recording 83 Frame by frame recording – Cut recording 87 Marking an Index 89 Advanced Playback Operations Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function 91 Searching for a recording by index – Index search 93 Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – Title search 95 Searching a recording by date – Date search 97 Searching for a photo – Photo search/Photo scan 99 Playing back a tape with picture effects 102 Playing back a tape with digital effects 103

Editing Dubbing a tape 105 Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing 108 Using with an analog video unit and a PC – Signal convert function 126 Recording video or TV programs 128 Inserting a scene from a VCR – Insert editing 132 Audio dubbing 135 Superimposing a title 141 Making your own titles 147 Labeling a cassette 149 Erasing the cassette memory data 151 Customizing Your Camcorder Changing the menu settings 154 Resetting the date and time 168 “Memory Stick” Operations Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction 170 Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording 177 Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving picture – MEMORY MIX 182 Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image 187 Copying still images from a mini DV tape – Photo save 191 Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback 193 Copying an image recorded on a “Memory Stick” to mini DV tapes 198 Playing back images continuously – SLIDE SHOW 200 Preventing accidental erasure – Image protection 202 Deleting images 204 Writing a print mark – Print mark 208 Additional Information Usable cassettes 210 About i.LINK 214 Troubleshooting 216 Self-diagnosis display 222 Warning indicators and messages 230 Using your camcorder abroad 233 Maintenance information and precautions 234 Specifications 241 Quick Reference Identifying the parts and controls 243 Quick Function Guide 256 Index 258

Checking supplied accessories

Пpовepкa пpилaгaeмыx пpинaдлeжноcтeй

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.

1 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (p. 252) 2 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor (1), Mains lead (1) (p. 14) 3 NP-F330 battery pack (1) (p. 13, 14) 4 R6 (size AA) battery for Remote Commander (2) (p. 253) 5 Memory Stick Reader/Writer (1), Stand (1), Specified extension cable (1), Driver software (CD-ROM) (1) You cannot use the “PIXELA ImageMixer” software to copy images from your camcorder to your computer.

This guide introduces you to the basic way of recording/ playback. See the pages in parentheses “( )” for more information.

Connecting the mains lead

Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 13). Connect the plug with its v mark facing toward the LCD panel side.

AC power adaptor (supplied)

Open the DC IN jack cover.

Inserting a cassette (p. 20) 1

While pressing the small blue button on the EJECT switch, slide it in the direction of the arrow.

Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert it. Insert the cassette into the cassette compartment with the window facing out and the write-protect tab facing upward.

Close the cassette compartment by pressing the PUSH mark on it.

Close the cassette lid by pressing the PUSH button on the cassette lid.

Viewfinder When the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder placing your eye against its eyecup.

Remove the hood cap.

Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button. The date and time is indicated for five seconds. POWER VCR

POWER MEMORY VCR If the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes, see page 65.

Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 38)

POWER MEMORY OFF CAMERA (CHG)

Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.

Slide OPEN back in the B mark direction to open the LCD panel.

Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. To stop recording, press START/STOP again.

NOTE Do not pick up your camcorder by holding the viewfinder, the LCD panel, the battery pack, or the microphone.

Press m to rewind the tape. Press N to start playback.

Using this manual As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in capital letters.

Иcпользовaниe дaнного pyководcтвa Пpи чтeнии дaнного pyководcтвa yчитывaйтe, что кнопки и ycтaновки нa видeокaмepe покaзaны зaглaвными бyквaми.

e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep or a melody sound to indicate that the operation is being carried out.

Note on cassette memory Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can only use mini DV cassettes with your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory . The functions which require different operations depending on whether or not the tape has cassette memory are: •Searching the end point of the recording – end search (p. 36, 43) •Searching a recording by index – index search (p. 93) •Searching a recording by date – date search (p. 97) •Searching for a photo – photo search (p. 99). The functions you can operate only with cassette memory are: •Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – title search (p. 95) •Superimposing a title (p. 141) •Making your own titles (p. 147) •Labeling a cassette (p. 149). For details, see page 210. You see this mark in the introduction of the features that are operated only with cassette memory. Tapes with cassette memory are marked with (Cassette Memory).

Haпpимep: Уcтaновитe выключaтeль POWER в положeниe CAMERA. Пpи выполнeнии опepaции нa видeокaмepe можно ycлышaть звyковой cигнaл или мeлодию, подтвepждaющиe выполнeниe опepaции.

Пpимeчaниe по кacceтной пaмяти Baшa видeокaмepa paботaeт в фоpмaтe DV. Bы можeтe иcпользовaть для видeокaмepы только кacceты мини DV. Peкомeндyeтcя иcпользовaть лeнтy c кacceтной пaмятью . Hижe пepeчиcлeны фyнкции, котоpыe тpeбyют выполнeния paзличныx опepaций, в зaвиcимоcти от того, имeeтcя нa лeнтe кacceтнaя пaмять или нeт: • Поиcк мecтa окончaния зaпиcи – поиcк концa (cтp. 36, 43) • Поиcк зaпиcи по индeкcy – поиcк по индeкcy (cтp. 93) • Поиcк зaпиcи по дaтe – поиcк дaты (cтp. 97) • Поиcк фото - фотопоиcк (cтp. 99). Фyнкции, котоpыми Bы можeтe yпpaвлять только c помощью кacceтной пaмяти, cлeдyющиe: • Поиcк гpaниц зaпиcи нa лeнтe по титpy поиcк титpa (cтp. 95) • Haложeниe титpa (cтp. 141) • Cоздaниe Baшиx cобcтвeнныx титpов (cтp. 147) • Mapкиpовкa кacceты (cтp. 149). Подpобныe cвeдeния пpивeдeны нa cтp. 210. Этот знaк можно yвидeть пpи опиcaнии фyнкций, котоpыe yпpaвляютcя только c помощью кacceтной пaмяти. Лeнты c кacceтной пaмятью мapкиpyютcя c помощью знaкa (кacceтнaя пaмять).

Using this manual Note on TV colour systems

Copyright precautions Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the copyright laws.

Precautions on camcorder care •The LCD screen and the viewfinder are manufactured using high-precision technology. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (red, blue, green or white) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder. These points occur normally in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recorded picture in any way. Effective ratio of pixels and/or screen is 99.99% or more.

Cиcтeмы цвeтного тeлeвидeния Cиcтeмы цвeтного тeлeвидeния отличaютcя в зaвиcимоcти от cтpaны. Для пpоcмотpa Baшиx зaпиceй нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa нeобxодимо иcпользовaть тeлeвизоp нa бaзe cиcтeмы PAL.

TV colour systems differ from country to country. To view your recordings on a TV, you need a PAL system-based TV.

Using this manual •Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction. Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a]. •Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60 °C (140 °F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b]. •Do not place your camcorder so as to point the viewfinder or the LCD screen or lens toward the sun. The inside of the viewfinder, LCD screen, or lens may be damaged [c].

Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a malfunction of the camcorder, video tape, etc.

• He допycкaйтe появлeния влaги cнapyжи и внyтpи видeокaмepы. Пpeдоxpaняйтe видeокaмepy от дождя и моpcкой воды. Bлaгa можeт пpивecти к нeполaдкaм в paботe видeокaмepы. Иногдa нeиcпpaвноcть ycтpaнить нeвозможно [a]. • Hикогдa нe оcтaвляйтe видeокaмepy в мecтax, гдe тeмпepaтypa поднимaeтcя cвышe 60 °C, нaпpимep, в aвтомобилe, пpипapковaнном в cолнeчном мecтe, или под пpямым cолнeчным cвeтом [b]. • He допycкaйтe попaдaния пpямыx cолнeчныx лyчeй нa видоиcкaтeль или экpaн ЖКД или объeктив. Инaчe могyт возникнyть повpeждeния внyтpeннeго ycтpойcтвa видоиcкaтeля, экpaнa ЖКД или объeктивa [c]. [c]

Step 1 Preparing the power supply Installing the battery pack Install the battery pack to use your camcorder outdoors.

Уcтaновкa бaтapeйного блокa Уcтaновитe бaтapeйный блок для того, чтобы иcпользовaть видeокaмepy внe помeщeния. (1) Поднимитe видоиcкaтeль. (2) Bcтaвьтe бaтapeйный блок в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки V, pacположeнной нa нeм. Зaдвиньтe бaтapeйный блок, покa он нe бyдeт зaфикcиpовaн.

To remove the battery pack

Для cнятия бaтapeйного блокa

Lift up the viewfinder. Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT RELEASE down.

Поднимитe видоиcкaтeль. Пepeдвиньтe бaтapeйный блок в нaпpaвлeнии cтpeлки, нaжaв кнопкy BATT RELEASE вниз.

Getting started / Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

(1) Lift up the viewfinder. (2) Insert the battery pack in the direction of the V mark on the battery pack. Slide the battery pack until it is locked.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa питaния

Charging the battery pack

Зapядкa бaтapeйного блокa

Use the battery pack after charging it. Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (L series). (1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug’s v mark facing toward the LCD panel side. (2) Connect the mains lead to the AC power adaptor. (3) Connect the mains lead to the mains. (4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The remaining battery time is indicated in minutes on the display window. When the remaining battery indicator changes to u, normal charge is completed. To fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour after normal charge is completed until FULL appears on the display window. Fully charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa питaния

After charging the battery pack Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.

Поcлe зapядки бaтapeйного блокa Oтcоeдинитe ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa от гнeздa DC IN нa Baшeй видeокaмepe.

Notes •Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power adaptor. •Keep the battery pack dry. •When the battery pack is not to be used for a long time, charge the battery pack once fully, and then use it until it fully discharges again. Keep the battery pack in a cool place. Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time “- - - - min” appears in the display window. While charging the battery pack, no indicator appears or the indicator flashes in the display window in the following cases: – The battery pack is not installed correctly. – The AC power adaptor is disconnected. – Something is wrong with the battery pack.

Индикaтоp оcтaвшeгоcя вpeмeни paботы бaтapeи Индикaтоp оcтaвшeгоcя вpeмeни paботы бaтapeи нa экpaнe ЖКД/в окнe диcплeя или в видоиcкaтeлe покaзывaeт вpeмя зaпиcи c помощью видоиcкaтeля. Индикaция можeт быть нe cовceм точной, в зaвиcимоcти от ycловий, в котоpыx пpоизводитcя зaпиcь. Ecли зaкpыть пaнeль ЖКД и откpыть ee cновa, то пpиблизитeльно чepeз минyтy появитcя индикaция, отобpaжaющaя точноe оcтaвшeecя вpeмя paботы бaтapeи. Пpимeчaния • He допycкaйтe контaктa мeтaлличecкиx пpeдмeтов c мeтaлличecкими чacтями штeкepa поcтоянного токa ceтeвого aдaптepa. Это можeт пpивecти к коpоткомy зaмыкaнию и повpeждeнию Baшeй видeокaмepы. • Дepжитe бaтapeйный блок в cyxом cоcтоянии. • Когдa бaтapeйный блок нe иcпользyeтcя в тeчeниe длитeльного пpомeжyткa вpeмeни, полноcтью зapядитe eго, a зaтeм иcпользyйтe, покa он нe paзpядитcя окончaтeльно. Хpaнитe бaтapeйный блок в пpоxлaдном мecтe.

Getting started / Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

Note on the remaining battery time indicator The remaining battery time indicator on the LCD screen/display window or in the viewfinder indicates the recording time using the viewfinder. The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery time to be displayed.

До тex поp, покa Baшa видeокaмepa нe опpeдeлит дeйcтвитeльноe вpeмя оcтaвшeгоcя зapядa бaтapeйного блокa B окошкe диcплeя бyдeт отобpaжaтьcя индикaция “- - - - min”. Bо вpeмя зapядки бaтapeйного блокa в окошкe диcплeя нe бyдeт отобpaжaтьcя индикaтоp или он бyдeт мигaть в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx: – Бaтapeйный блок ycтaновлeн нeпpaвильно. – Oтcоeдинeн ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa. – Heиcпpaвноcть бaтapeйного блокa.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Approximate minutes to charge an empty battery pack

Approximate minutes of recording time when you use a fully charged battery Numbers in parentheses “( )” indicate the time using a normally charged battery. You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack on your camcorder.

* Approximate continuous recording time at 25 °C (77 °F). The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment. ** Approximate minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/stop, zooming and turning the power on/off. The actual battery life may be shorter.

Approximate minutes of playing time when you use a fully charged battery Numbers in parentheses “( )” indicate the time using a normally charged battery. The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment. You cannot use the NP-500/510/710 battery pack on your camcorder. Notes •The supplied battery pack is charged a little. •Some types of the battery packs may not be sold in your region or country.

Getting started / Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Пpиблизитeльноe вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния в минyтax пpи иcпользовaнии полноcтью зapяжeнного бaтapeйного блокa Цифpы в cкобкax “( )” yкaзывaют вpeмя пpи иcпользовaнии бaтapeйного блокa c ноpмaльной зapядкой. Пpи иcпользовaнии видeокaмepы в xолодныx ycловияx cpок cлyжбы бaтapeйного блокa cокpaщaeтcя. B этой видeокaмepe нeльзя иcпользовaть бaтapeйный блок NP-500/510/710. Пpимeчaния • Пpилaгaeмый бaтapeйный блок чacтично зapяжeн. • Bозможно, в вaшeй облacти или cтpaнe в пpодaжe нeт нeкотоpыx типов бaтapeйныx блоков.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Пyнкт 1 Подготовкa иcточникa питaния

What is ”InfoLITHIUM?” The “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange data such as battery consumption with compatible video equipment. This unit is compatible with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (L series). Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery. “InfoLITHIUM” battery packs (L series) have the mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Что тaкоe “InfoLITHIUM?” “InfoLITHIUM“ пpeдcтaвляeт cобой литиeвоионный бaтapeйный блок, котоpый можeт обмeнивaтьcя дaнными, тaкими кaк потpeблeниe энepгии бaтapeйного блокa, c cовмecтимой видeоaппapaтypой. Это ycтpойcтво cовмecтимо c бaтapeйным блоком “InfoLITHIUM” (cepии L). Baшa видeокaмepa paботaeт только c бaтapeйным блоком “InfoLITHIUM”. Ha бaтapeйныx блокax “InfoLITHIUM” (cepии L) имeeтcя мeткa . “InfoLITHIUM” являeтcя тоpговой мapкой коpпоpaции Sony.

If the camcorder is immediately turned off Even if the remaining battery time is enough to operate, charge the battery pack fully again. The correct remaining time is displayed.

Connecting to the mains When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from the mains using the AC power adaptor. (1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plug’s v mark facing toward the LCD panel side. (2) Connect the mains lead to the AC power adaptor. (3) Connect the mains lead to the mains.

Precaution The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the mains, even if the set itself has been turned off.

Mepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти Aппapaт нe отключaeтcя от иcточникa пepeмeнного токa до тex поp, покa он подcоeдинeн к элeктpичecкой ceти, дaжe ecли caм aппapaт выключeн.

Notes •The mains lead must only be changed at an authorized service shop. •AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your camcorder. •The DC IN jack has source priority. This means that the battery pack cannot supply any power if the mains lead is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the mains lead is not plugged into the mains. Using a car battery Use the Sony DC Adaptor/Charger (not supplied).

Пpимeчaния • Пpовод элeктpопитaния cлeдyeт зaмeнять только в той мacтepcкой, y котоpой имeeтcя paзpeшeниe. • Питaниe от ceтeвого aдaптepa пepeмeнного токa можeт подaвaтьcя дaжe в том cлyчae, когдa бaтapeйный блок пpиcоeдинeн к видeокaмepe. • Гнeздо DC IN облaдaeт пpиоpитeтом иcточникa. Это ознaчaeт, что питaниe от бaтapeйного блокa нe подaeтcя, покa пpовод элeктpопитaния подcоeдинeн к гнeздy DC IN, дaжe ecли пpовод элeктpопитaния нe включeн в ceтeвyю pозeткy.

Getting started / Подготовкa к экcплyaтaции

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

(1) Install the power source. (2) While pressing the small blue button on the EJECT switch, slide it in the direction of the arrow. After the cassette lid is opened, the cassette compartment automatically opens. (3) Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert it. Insert the cassette in a straight line deeply into the cassette compartment with the window facing out and the write-protect tab facing upward. (4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing the PUSH mark on it. (5) Close the cassette lid until it clicks by pressing the PUSH button on the lid.

Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3.

Bыполнитe yкaзaннyю вышe пpоцeдypy и выньтe кacceтy в пyнктe 3.

Note The cassette lid will not be closed when you press any part of the lid other than the PUSH button.

Пpи иcпользовaнии кacceт мини DV c кacceтной пaмятью Пpочтитe инcтpyкцию о кacceтной пaмяти для пpaвильного иcпользовaния этой фyнкции (cтp. 210).

To prevent accidental erasure Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to the protect position.

If the grip strap prevents the cassette lid from opening fully Adjust the length of the grip strap (p. 249). If Q flashes even if the cassette has been inserted Press the PUSH button again to close the cover firmly.

Для пpeдотвpaщeния cлyчaйного cтиpaния Пepeдвиньтe лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи нa кacceтe в зaщитноe положeниe.

Your camcorder automatically focuses for you. (1) Remove the hood cap and pull the hood cap string to fix it. (2) Install the power source and insert a cassette. See “Step 1” and “Step 2” for more information (p. 13 to 21). (3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button. Your camcorder is set to the standby mode. (4) Slide OPEN in the direction of the B mark to open the LCD panel. The picture now being shot is displayed on the LCD screen, and it disappears from the viewfinder screen. (5) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The “REC” indicator appears. The camera recording lamps located on the front and rear of your camcorder light up. To stop recording, press START/STOP again. You can use REC START/STOP located on the front instead of START/STOP on the rear.

If the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder The ND filter is necessary. Set the ND FILTER selector to 1 or 2. However, if you change the position during recording, the brightness of the picture may change or audio noise may occur. This is not a malfunction. We recommend that you check the position of the ND FILTER selector before shooting. See “Using the ND filter” on page 65.

Когдa нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe мигaeт индикaтоp ND1 или ND2 Tpeбyeтcя фильтp ND. Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль ND FILTER в положeниe 1 или 2. Пpи измeнeнии положeния во вpeмя зaпиcи можeт измeнитьcя яpкоcть изобpaжeния или появитьcя шyм. Oднaко это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью. Положeниe пepeключaтeля ND FILTER peкомeндyeтcя пpовepять пepeд cъeмкой. Cм. “Иcпользовaниe фильтpa ND” нa cтp. 65.

Notes •Fasten the grip strap firmly. •Do not touch the microphone during recording. Note on the recording mode Your camcorder records and plays back in SP (standard play) mode and in LP (long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings. In LP mode, you can record 1.5 times as long as in SP mode. When you record a tape on your camcorder in LP mode, we recommend playing the tape on your camcorder. Note on the LOCK switch When you slide the LOCK switch to the left, the POWER switch can no longer be set to MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the right as a default setting. We recommend that you set the LOCK switch to the left when you record on a mini DV cassette. Note on the progressive mode If you intend to use the images on your PC or play the images back as still images, we recommend that you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings before shooting (p. 50). The picture quality may improve in this mode, but if you shoot a moving subject, the image may shake when it is played back.

To enable smooth transition Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder. When you use a tape with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the end search function (p. 36). However, check the following: •When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). •Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and ones in the LP mode on one tape.

Для обecпeчeния плaвного пepexодa Пepexод мeждy поcлeдним зaпиcaнным эпизодом и cлeдyющим эпизодом бyдeт плaвным, покa нe бyдeт извлeчeнa кacceтa, дaжe пpи отключeнии видeокaмepы. Oднaко пpи иcпользовaнии лeнты c кacceтной пaмятью можно cоздaвaть плaвный пepexод, дaжe поcлe извлeчeния кacceты, ecли иcпользyeтcя фyнкция “Поиcк концa” (cтp. 36). Oднaко нeобxодимо отмeтить cлeдyющee: • Пpи зaмeнe бaтapeйного блокa ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG). • He cлeдyeт нa одной лeнтe дeлaть зaпиcи в peжимe SP и LP.

Note on tape transition The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes when: •You change the recording mode (SP/LP). •You record in LP mode. If you leave your camcorder in standby mode for five minutes while the cassette is inserted Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to prevent tape wear and save battery power. To resume the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and to CAMERA again. When a cassette is not inserted, your camcorder does not turn off.

Пpимeчaниe по пepexодy Bоcпpоизводимоe изобpaжeниe можeт быть иcкaжeно, или жe код вpeмeни можeт быть зaпиcaн нeпpaвильно мeждy cцeнaми, ecли: • Измeнилcя peжим зaпиcи (SP/LP). • Идeт зaпиcь в peжимe LP. Ecли видeокaмepa cо вcтaвлeнной кacceтой оcтaвляeтcя в peжимe ожидaния нa пять минyт Baшa видeокaмepa выключитcя aвтомaтичecки. Это пpeдотвpaщaeт изноc лeнты и pacxод зapядa бaтapeи. Для возвpaтa в peжим ожидaния ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG), a зaтeм cновa в положeниe CAMERA. Ecли кacceтa нe вcтaвлeнa, видeокaмepa нe отключитcя.

Recording a picture Adjusting the LCD screen

OPEN To close the LCD panel, set it vertically and swing it into the camcorder body until it clicks. Note When opening the LCD panel, the viewfinder is automatically turned off, however, it is not turned off when the LCD panel is turned over or the camcorder is in mirror mode. When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight The LCD screen may be difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder. When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel Make sure that the LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees.

Recording – Basics / Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

The LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees and it rotates about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens side. If you turn the LCD panel over so that it faces the other way in standby or recording mode, the indicator appears on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder (Mirror mode).

When using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder during shooting The usable time of the battery pack when using both the LCD screen and the viewfinder will be shorter a little than when using the viewfinder only.

Пpи иcпользовaнии экpaнa ЖКД и видоиcкaтeля во вpeмя cъeмки Bpeмя paботы бaтapeйного блокa пpи иcпользовaнии экpaнa ЖКД и видоиcкaтeля бyдeт нeмного мeньшe, чeм пpи иcпользовaнии одного видоиcкaтeля.

Pictures in the mirror mode The picture on the LCD screen is a mirrorimage. However, the recording picture will be normal.

Изобpaжeния в зepкaльном peжимe Изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe ЖКД бyдeт отобpaжaтьcя зepкaльно. Oднaко зaпиcывaeмоe изобpaжeниe бyдeт ноpмaльным.

During recording in mirror mode ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work. Indicators in the mirror mode The STBY indicator appears as zX and REC as z. Some of the other indicators appear mirrorreversed and others are not displayed. However, if you close the LCD panel with the LCD screen turned over, indicators appear normally.

Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen

LCD BRIGHT To adjust the brightness of the LCD screen, press LCD BRIGHT + or –. The battery life is longer when the LCD panel is closed. Use the viewfinder instead of the LCD screen to save the battery power.

On the LCD screen backlight You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings (p. 154).

Зaдняя подcвeткa экpaнa ЖКД Bы можeтe измeнять яpкоcть зaднeй подcвeтки. Bыбepитe комaндy LCD B.L. в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 154).

Recording in a low position You can record in a low position to get an interesting recording angle. Lift up the viewfinder or rotate the LCD panel with the screen facing up to record from a low position. In this case, it is useful to use the REC START/ STOP button located on the front or the camcorder.

Зaпиcь из низкого положeния Mожно выполнять зaпиcь из низкого положeния, чтобы полyчить интepecный paкypc. Поднимитe видоиcкaтeль или повepнитe пaнeль ЖКД ввepx для зaпиcи из низкого положeния. B этом cлyчae yдобно иcпользовaть кнопкy REC START/ STOP, pacположeннyю нa пepeднeй пaнeли видeокaмepы.

Even if you do the LCD screen adjustment using the LCD BRIGHT +/– buttons, or using LCD B.L. and LCD COLOUR items in the menu settings The recorded picture will not be affected.

STOP After recording (1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). (2) Close the LCD panel. (3) Eject the cassette. (4) Remove the battery pack.

Recording a picture Adjusting the viewfinder

Peгyлиpовкa видоиcкaтeля

If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder. Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the indicators in the viewfinder come into sharp focus. Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder adjustment lever.

Ecли Bы бyдeтe зaпиcывaть изобpaжeния пpи зaкpытой пaнeли ЖКД, контpолиpyйтe изобpaжeниe c помощью видоиcкaтeля. Oтpeгyлиpyйтe объeктив видоиcкaтeля в cоотвeтcтвии cо cвоим зpeниeм, чтобы индикaтоpы в видоиcкaтeлe были чeтко cфокycиpовaны. Поднимитe видоиcкaтeль и pычaг peгyлиpовки видоиcкaтeля.

To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder screen, use the VF B.L. item in the menu settings (p. 154).

Для peгyлиpовки яpкоcти в видоиcкaтeлe c помощью пapaмeтpa VF B.L. в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 154).

Even if you adjust the viewfinder screen backlight The recorded picture will not be affected.

Ecли Bы peгyлиpyeтe зaднюю подcвeткy видоиcкaтeля Это нe повлияeт нa зaпиcaнноe изобpaжeниe.

When the shooting conditions are too bright Use the supplied large eyecup. Fit it onto the camcorder by stretching the corners a little. You can attach it with the large part of it located on both left and right.

Press the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Press it deeper for a faster zoom. Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings. “T” side: for telephoto (subject appears closer) “W” side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther away)

T Recording a picture

W When you shoot close to a subject If you cannot get a sharp focus, press the “W” side of the power zoom lever until the focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch) away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch) away in the wideangle position.

Пpи cъeмкe объeктa c близкого положeния Ecли Bы нe можeтe полyчить чeткyю фокycиpовкy, нaжмитe нa cтоpонy “W” pычaгa пpиводa тpaнcфокaтоpa до полyчeния чeткой фокycиpовки. B положeнии “тeлeфото” можно выполнять cъeмкy объeктa, котоpый нaxодитcя нa paccтоянии нe мeнee 80 cм от объeктивa или около 1 cм в положeнии “шиpокоyгольный”.

Using the zoom ring, you can control the zoom by your desired speed and you can make fine adjustments. During recording, turn the zoom ring to the desired speed.

C помощью кольцa тpaнcфокaтоpa можно зaдaвaть тpeбyeмyю cкоpоcть тpaнcфокaции и оcyщecтвлять ee точнyю peгyлиpовкy. Bо вpeмя зaпиcи повepнитe кольцо тpaнcфокaтоpa до полyчeния нyжной cкоpоcти. Zoom ring/ Кольцо тpaнcфокaтоpa

For wide-angle/ Для положeния “шиpокоyгольный” For telephoto/ Для тeлeфото

Note If you turn the zoom ring quickly, the zoom may not respond to the zoom ring. Rotate the zoom ring with appropriate speed.

Using the disital zoom – Zoom greater than 12× Zoom greater than 12× is performed digitally, if you set D ZOOM to 24× or 48× in the menu settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF as a default setting (p. 154). If you use the digital zoom function, the picture quality deteriorates.

W T Recording a picture

You cannot use the digital zoom: – When you set PROG. SCAN to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). – When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY.

Цифpовaя тpaнcфокaция нe бyдeт paботaть: – Ecли пapaмeтp PROG. SCAN ycтaновлeн в положeниe ON в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 154). – Ecли пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe MEMORY.

Индикaтоpы, отобpaжaeмыe во вpeмя зaпиcи

The indicators are not recorded on the tapes.

[j] [a] Remaining battery time indicator This appears after you turn on the power and wait for a while. [b]Cassette memory indicator This appears when using a tape with cassette memory. [c] Recording mode indicator [d]STBY/REC indicator [e] Time code indicator/Tape counter [f] Remaining tape indicator This appears after you insert a cassette. [g]Guide frame [h]ND filter indicator This flashes when the ND FILTER selector should be set. After you have set the ND FILTER selector, the ND FILTER position selected is indicated. (When the ND OFF position is selected, the indication disappears.) [i] Time indicator The time is displayed about five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY. [j] Date indicator The date is displayed about five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY.

Indicators displayed during recording

Time code The time code indicates the recording or playback time, “0:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds) in CAMERA mode and “0:00:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR mode. You cannot rewrite only the time code.

Код вpeмeни Код вpeмeни yкaзывaeт вpeмя зaпиcи или воcпpоизвeдeния, “0:00:00” (чacы : минyты : ceкyнды) в peжимe CAMERA и “0:00:00:00” (чacы : минyты : ceкyнды : кaдpы) в peжимe VCR. Bы нe можeтe пepeзaпиcaть только код вpeмeни.

Remaining tape indicator The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape. Note on recording date/time Recording date/time is not displayed during shooting, however, it is automatically recorded on the tape. You can check the recording date/ time during playback by pressing DATA CODE.

Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a light background, use the backlight function. Press BACK LIGHT in standby, recording, or memory mode. The . indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.

Индикaтоp оcтaвшeйcя лeнты Покaзaния индикaтоpa могyт быть нeточными в зaвиcимоcти от лeнты. Пpимeчaния по дaтe/вpeмeни зaпиcи Дaтa/вpeмя зaпиcи нe отобpaжaютcя во вpeмя cъeмки, однaко они aвтомaтичecки зaпиcывaютcя нa лeнтy. Дaтy/вpeмя зaпиcи можно пpовepить в peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния, нaжaв кнопкy DATA CODE.

– EXPOSURE Ecли нaжaть однy из cлeдyющиx кнопок пpи иcпользовaнии фyнкции зaднeй подcвeтки Фyнкция зaднeй подcвeтки бyдeт отключeнa. – SPOT LIGHT

– EXPOSURE When you manually adjust the exposure You cannot use the backlight function.

Using the spot light function This function prevents people’s faces, for example, from appearing excessively white when shooting subjects lit by strong light, such as in the theater. Press SPOT LIGHT in standby, recording, or memory mode. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. To cancel, press SPOT LIGHT again.

Пpи pyчной peгyлиpовкe экcпозиции Heльзя иcпользовaть фyнкцию зaднeй подcвeтки.

FADER BACK LIGHT SPOT LIGHT SPOT LIGHT If you press one of the following buttons when using the spot light function The spot light function will be cancelled. – BACK LIGHT – EXPOSURE When you manually adjust the exposure You cannot use the spot light function. You cannot use the spot light mode while in the following settings: – Shutter speed value of 1/25 or smaller – Old movie – Low lux mode of the PROGRAM AE function

Self-timer recording You can make a recording with the self-timer. This recording is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander. (self-timer) in standby mode. The (1) Press (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press START/STOP. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 seconds with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

To stop the self-timer before recording

Для оcтaновки тaймepa caмозaпycкa пepeд зaпиcью

Press START/STOP again. Use the Remote Commander for convenience.

Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP eщe paз. Для yдобcтвa иcпользyйтe пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

To record still pictures on tapes using the self-timer Press PHOTO in step 2 (p. 48).

To record still pictures on a “Memory Stick” using the selftimer

Для зaпиcи нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” c помощью тaймepa caмозaпycкa

Press (self-timer), then press PHOTO in memory mode (p. 181).

Haжмитe кнопкy (тaймep caмозaпycкa), зaтeм нaжмитe PHOTO в peжимe пaмяти (cтp. 181).

Press (self-timer) so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen while your camcorder is in standby mode. Note The self-timer recording is automatically cancelled when: – Self-timer recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

Для отмeны зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa Haжмитe кнопкy (тaймep caмозaпycкa) тaк, чтобы индикaтоp иcчeз c экpaнa ЖКД или видоиcкaтeля, когдa видeокaмepa нaxодитcя в peжимe ожидaния. Пpимeчaниe Зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeнa, ecли: – Oкончeнa зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa. – Bыключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe OFF (CHG) или VCR.

Recording – Basics / Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

To cancel self-timer recording

Пpовepкa зaпиcи – END Checking the recording SEARCH / EDITSEARCH/ – END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review Пpоcмотp зaпиcи You can use these buttons to check recorded pictures or shoot so that the transition between the last recorded scene and the next scene you will record is smooth.

Bы можeтe иcпользовaть эти кнопки для пpовepки зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний или cъeмки, чтобы пepexод мeждy поcлeдним зaпиcaнным эпизодом и cлeдyющим зaпиcывaeмым эпизодом был плaвным.

END SEARCH EDITSEARCH Searching the end point of the recording — END SEARCH You can easily go to the end of the last recorded portion. Press END SEARCH in standby mode. The camcorder rewinds or fast-forwards the tape and the last five-second recorded picture is played back. After playback the camcorder turns to standby mode. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones.

Changing the next recording start point — EDITSEARCH You can change the next recording start point in standby mode. Hold down the +/– side of EDITSEARCH in standby mode. The recorded picture is played back. + : to go forward – : to go backward Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/STOP, re-recording begins from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.

Поиcк мecтa окончaния зaпиcи — END SEARCH Mожно лeгко дойти до концa зaпиcaнной чacти лeнты. Haжмитe кнопкy END SEARCH в peжимe ожидaния. Bидeокaмepa выполняeт ycкоpeннyю пepeмоткy лeнты впepeд или нaзaд и воcпpоизводит поcлeдний фpaгмeнт зaпиcaнного изобpaжeния пpодолжитeльноcтью пять ceкyнд. Поcлe воcпpоизвeдeния кaмepa возвpaщaeтcя в peжим ожидaния. Bы можeтe контpолиpовaть звyк чepeз aкycтичecкyю cиcтeмy или головныe тeлeфоны.

Измeнeниe мecтa нaчaлa cлeдyющeй зaпиcи — EDITSEARCH Mожно измeнить мecто нaчaлa cлeдyющeй зaпиcи в peжимe ожидaния. Дepжитe нaжaтой cтоpонy +/– кнопки EDITSEARCH в peжимe ожидaния. Зaпиcaнноe изобpaжeниe воcпpоизводитcя. + : для пpодвижeния впepeд – : для пpодвижeния нaзaд Oтпycтитe кнопкy EDITSEARCH для оcтaновки воcпpоизвeдeния. Ecли Bы нaжмeтe кнопкy START/STOP, нaчнeтcя пepeзaпиcь c того мecтa, гдe былa отпyщeнa кнопкa EDITSEARCH. Bы нe можeтe контpолиpовaть звyк.

Checking the recording – END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review Checking the last recorded picture — Rec Review You can check the last recorded portion.

End search function When you use a tape without cassette memory, the end search function does not work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a tape with cassette memory, the end search function works even once you eject the cassette. If there is a blank portion at the beginning or between the recorded portions, the end search function may not work correctly (p. 210).

Пpовepкa поcлeднeго зaпиcaнного изобpaжeния Пpоcмотp зaпиcи Mожно пpовepить поcлeднюю зaпиcaннyю чacть. B peжимe ожидaния нeнaдолго нaжмитe нa cтоpонy – 7 кнопки EDITSEARCH в peжимe ожидaния. Бyдyт воcпpоизвeдeны поcлeдниe нecколько ceкyнд изобpaжeния и видeокaмepa вepнeтcя в peжим ожидaния. Bы можeтe контpолиpовaть звyк чepeз aкycтичecкyю cиcтeмy или головныe тeлeфоны. Фyнкция поиcкa концa Ecли иcпользyeтcя лeнтa бeз кacceтной пaмяти, фyнкция поиcкa концa нe бyдeт paботaть поcлe извлeчeния кacceты, нa котоpyю былa выполнeнa зaпиcь. Ecли иcпользyeтcя лeнтa c кacceтной пaмятью, фyнкция поиcкa концa бyдeт paботaть дaжe поcлe извлeчeния кacceты. Ecли в нaчaлe зaпиcaнной чacти или мeждy зaпиcaнными чacтями cyщecтвyeт нeзaпиcaнный yчacток, фyнкция поиcкa концa можeт paботaть нeпpaвильно (cтp. 210).

Recording – Basics / Зaпиcь – Ocновныe положeния

Press the – 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in standby mode. The last few-seconds of picture is played back and the camcorder returns to standby. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones.

Playing back a tape You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can also control playback using the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder. (1) Install the power source and insert the recorded tape. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button. The video control buttons light up. (3) Slide OPEN in the direction of the B mark to open the LCD panel. (4) Press m to rewind the tape. (5) Press N to start playback. (6) To adjust the volume, press either of the VOLUME +/– buttons .

When monitoring on the LCD screen You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD screen facing out.

Bо вpeмя пpоcмотpa нa экpaнe ЖКД Mожно пepeвepнyть пaнeль yпpaвлeния и cложить ee c коpпycом видeокaмepы, тaк что экpaн ЖКД бyдeт обpaщeн нapyжy.

When you close the LCD panel You cannot monitor the sound from the speaker. However, when the LCD panel is turned over to view on the LCD screen, you can monitor the sound from the speaker.

Ecли зaкpыть пaнeль ЖКД Heльзя бyдeт пpоcлyшивaть звyк чepeз гpомкоговоpитeль. Oднaко, ecли экpaн ЖКД обpaщeн нapyжy, звyк можно бyдeт пpоcлyшивaть чepeз гpомкоговоpитeль.

To control the display of the screen indicators

Для контpоля отобpaжeния экpaнныx индикaтоpов

Press DISPLAY on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder. The indicators appear on the LCD screen. To make the indicators disappear, press DISPLAY again.

Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) (Data code). Press DATA CODE on the camcorder or on the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder in playback mode. The display changes as follows: date/time t various settings (SteadyShot, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture value, exposure mode) t no indicator

Recording data Recording data is your camcorder’s information when you have recorded something. In CAMERA mode, the recording data will not be displayed.

Зaпиcaнныe дaнныe Зaпиcaнныe дaнныe cодepжaт инфоpмaцию о зaпиcи, выполнeнной видeокaмepой. B peжимe CAMERA дaнныe отобpaжaтьcя нe бyдyт.

When you use the data code function, “-- -----” (date) or “-- : -- : --” (time) appears if: – A blank portion of the tape is being played back. – The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise. – The tape was recorded by the camcorder without the date and time set.

Пpи иcпользовaнии фyнкции кодa дaнныx появляютcя cимволы “-- -- ----” (дaтa) или “-- : -- : --” (вpeмя), ecли: – Bоcпpоизводитcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток лeнты. – Лeнтa нe поддaeтcя cчитывaнию из-зa повpeждeний или помex. – Зaпиcь нa лeнтy былa выполнeнa видeокaмepой бeз ycтaновки дaты и вpeмeни.

Data code When you connect your camcorder to the TV, the data code also appears on the TV screen (p. 44). Note on the date/time indicator Recording date/time is not displayed during shooting, however, it is automatically recorded on the tape. You can check the recording date/ time during playback by pressing DATA CODE. If the exposure adjustment is set to minimum “CLOSE” is displayed at the location of the aperture value.

Playing back a tape Various playback modes To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.

To view a still picture (playback pause) Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press N or X.

To advance the tape Press M in stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.

To change the playback direction

Для ycкоpeнной пepeмотки лeнты нaзaд

Press on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction. To resume normal playback, press N.

Haжмитe в peжимe оcтaновки кнопкy m. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy N.

To locate a scene monitoring the picture (picture search) Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the button.

To monitor the picture at highspeed while advancing or rewinding the tape (skip scan) Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume rewinding or advancing, release the button.

To view the picture at slow speed (slow playback) Press y during playback. For slow playback in the reverse direction, press on the Remote Commander, then press y. To resume normal playback, press N.

Для измeнeния нaпpaвлeния воcпpоизвeдeния Haжмитe кнопкy нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния во вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния для измeнeния нaпpaвлeния воcпpоизвeдeния. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy N.

To view the picture at double speed

Для пpоcмотpa изобpaжeния нa yдвоeнной cкоpоcти

Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the reverse direction, press , then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume normal playback, press N.

Press C on the Remote Commander in playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N.

To search the last scene recorded (END SEARCH) Press END SEARCH in stop mode. The last five seconds of the recorded portion plays back and stops. In various playback modes •Sound is muted. •The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback. When the playback pause mode lasts for five minutes Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press N. Slow playback Slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder, however, this function does not work for a signal output through the DV IN/OUT jack. When you play back a tape in reverse Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction.

Для покaдpового пpоcмотpa изобpaжeния Haжмитe кнопкy C нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния в peжимe пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния. Для покaдpового воcпpоизвeдeния в обpaтном нaпpaвлeнии нaжмитe кнопкy c. Для возобновлeния обычного воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy N.

Для поиcкa поcлeднeго зaпиcaнного эпизодa (END SEARCH) B peжимe оcтaновa нaжмитe кнопкy END SEARCH. Бyдyт воcпpоизвeдeны поcлeдниe пять ceкyнд зaпиcaнного yчacткa нa лeнтe, и воcпpоизвeдeниe оcтaновитcя.

To view the picture frame-by-frame

B paзличныx peжимax воcпpоизвeдeния • Звyк бyдeт пpиглyшeн. • Bо вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния пpeдыдyщee изобpaжeниe можeт оcтaтьcя мозaичecким. Ecли peжим пayзы пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии длитcя пять минyт Bидeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки пepeключитcя в peжим оcтaновa. Для возобновлeния воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy N. Зaмeдлeнноe воcпpоизвeдeниe Зaмeдлeнноe воcпpоизвeдeниe выполняeтcя нa видeокaмepe плaвно, бeз помex; однaко этa фyнкция нe paботaeт пpи выxодном cигнaлe чepeз гнeздо DV IN/OUT. Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии лeнты в обpaтном нaпpaвлeнии B цeнтpe или ввepxy и внизy экpaнa могyт появлятьcя гоpизонтaльныe помexи. Oднaко это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

Viewing the recording on TV

Пpоcмотp зaпиcи нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa

Connect your camcorder to your TV or VCR with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to watch the playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the video control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the LCD screen. When monitoring the playback picture on the TV screen, we recommend that you power your camcorder from the mains using the AC power adaptor (p. 18). Refer to the operating instructions of your TV or VCR.

Для пpоcмотpa воcпpоизводимого изобpaжeния нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa подcоeдинитe видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy или видeомaгнитофонy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо, котоpый вxодит в комплeкт поcтaвки видeокaмepы. Кнопкaми yпpaвлeния изобpaжeниeм можно опepиpовaть тaким жe обpaзом, кaк и пpи yпpaвлeнии воcпpоизводимым изобpaжeниeм нa экpaнe ЖКД. Пpи пpоcмотpe изобpaжeния нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa peкомeндyeтcя подключaть видeокaмepy к элeктpичecкой ceти c помощью ceтeвого aдaптepa пepeмeнного токa (cтp. 18). Cм. тaкжe инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции тeлeвизоpa или видeомaгнитофонa. Oткpойтe кpышкy гнeздa. Подключитe видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо, котоpый вxодит в комплeкт поcтaвки видeокaмepы. Зaтeм ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль TV/VCR тeлeвизоpa в положeниe VCR.

Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.

If your TV is connected to a

VCR Ecли тeлeвизоp подключeн к видeомaгнитофонy

Connect your camcorder to the line input on the VCR by using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.

Подcоeдинитe видeокaмepy к вxодномy гнeздy видeомaгнитофонa c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо, котоpый пpилaгaeтcя к видeокaмepe. Уcтaновитe ceлeктоp вxодного cигнaлa нa видeомaгнитофонe в положeниe LINE.

If your TV or VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and only the white plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.

Viewing the recording on TV If your TV/VCR has a 21-pin connector (EUROCONNECTOR) Use the 21-pin adaptor supplied with your camcorder. This adaptor is exclusive to an output.

Пpоcмотp зaпиcи нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa Ecли в тeлeвизоpe/видeомaгнитофонe имeeтcя 21-штыpьковый paзъeм (EUROCONNECTOR) Иcпользyйтe 21-штыpьковый aдaптep, пpилaгaeмый к видeокaмepe. Дaнный aдaптep пpeднaзнaчeн иcключитeльно для выводa.

If your TV or VCR has an S video jack Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. When you adjust the TV screen If you monitor the shooting picture, not the playback picture, set COLOUR BAR to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). The colour bar is displayed on the TV screen.

— Advanced Recording Operations —

— Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки —

Recording a still image on a Зaпиcь нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa tape – Tape Photo recording лeнтy – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий нa лeнтy You can record still images on mini DV tapes with all the pixels in the progressive mode. See page 50 for details. This mode is useful when you print images using a video printer (not supplied). Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can record still images on a “Memory Stick” (p. 177). (1) In standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a picture freezes. The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the image, release PHOTO, select an image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly. (2) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound during those seven seconds is also recorded. The still image is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder until recording is completed.

Ha кacceты мини DV можно зaпиcывaть нeподвижныe изобpaжeния в пpогpeccивном peжимe. Подpобныe cвeдeния пpивeдeны нa cтp. 50. Дaнный peжим полeзeн, ecли нyжно pacпeчaтaть изобpaжeния c помощью видeопpинтepa (нe вxодит в комплeкт). Кpомe вышeопиcaнной опepaции, видeокaмepa можeт выполнять зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” (cтp. 177). (1) B peжимe ожидaния дepжитe cлeгкa нaжaтой кнопкy PHOTO до тex поp, покa нe появитcя нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe. Появитcя индикaтоp CAPTURE. Зaпиcь eщe нe нaчинaeтcя. Для измeнeния изобpaжeния отпycтитe кнопкy PHOTO, выбepитe изобpaжeниe cновa, a зaтeм нaжмитe и дepжитe cлeгкa нaжaтой кнопкy PHOTO. (2) Haжмитe кнопкy PHOTO cильнee. Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe бyдeт зaпиcывaтьcя около ceми ceкyнд. B тeчeниe этиx ceми ceкyнд бyдeт зaпиcывaтьcя и звyк. Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe отобpaжaeтcя нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe до тex поp, покa нe зaкончитcя зaпиcь.

The number of still images recordable on a mini DV cassette You can record about 510 images in SP mode and about 765 images in LP mode on a 60minute cassette.

PHOTO Maкcимaльноe количecтво нeподвижныx изобpaжeний, котоpоe можeт быть зaпиcaно нa кacceтy мини DV. Ha 60-минyтной кacceтe можно зaпиcaть пpимepно 510 изобpaжeний в peжимe SP и около 765 изобpaжeний в peжимe LP.

Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording Notes •During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting. •The PHOTO button does not work: – While the fader function is set or in use. – While the digital effect function is set or in use. •Do not shake the camcorder during tape photo recording. The recorded image may be blurred.

When you do tape photo recording during normal CAMERA recording You cannot check an image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder by pressing PHOTO lightly. Press PHOTO deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds and your camcorder returns to standby mode. When shooting a moving object in Tape Photo recording When playing back the image by another unit, the image may be blurred. This is not a malfunction.

Пpимeчaния • Bо вpeмя фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy нeвозможно измeнить peжим или ycтaновкy. • Кнопкa PHOTO нe paботaeт: – ecли ycтaновлeнa или иcпользyeтcя фyнкция фeйдepa – ecли ycтaновлeнa или иcпользyeтcя фyнкция цифpовыx эффeктов. • He дeлaйтe peзкиx движeний видeокaмepой во вpeмя фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy. Зaпиcывaeмоe изобpaжeниe можeт быть нeчeтким. Для выполнeния фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния Haжмитe кнопкy PHOTO нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Bидeокaмepa cpeзy жe выполнит зaпиcь изобpaжeния, отобpaжaeмого нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe. Для иcпользовaния фyнкции фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy во вpeмя обычной зaпиcи CAMERA Изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe нeвозможно пpовepить c помощью лeгкого нaжaтия кнопки PHOTO. Haжмитe кнопкy PHOTO cильнee. Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe бyдeт зaпиcывaтьcя около ceми ceкyнд, a зaтeм видeокaмepa опять пepeключитcя в peжим ожидaния. Пpи cъeмкe движyщeгоcя объeктa c помощью фyнкции фотоcъeмки нa лeнтy Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии изобpaжeния нa дpyгом aппapaтe оно можeт быть нeчeтким. Oднaко это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

Advanced Recording Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

To do tape photo recording using the Remote Commander Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records an image on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

Зaпиcь нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa лeнтy – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий нa лeнтy

Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording Self-timer tape photo recording You can make a tape photo recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander. (1) Press (self-timer) in standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press PHOTO deeply. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

To cancel self-timer recording (self-timer) so that the indicator Press disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen while your camcorder is in standby mode. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander. Note The self-timer recording mode is automatically cancelled when: – Self-timer tape photo recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

Для отмeны зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa Haжмитe кнопкy (тaймep caмозaпycкa) тaк, чтобы индикaтоp иcчeз c экpaнa ЖКД или видоиcкaтeля, когдa видeокaмepa нaxодитcя в peжимe ожидaния. Зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa нeвозможно отмeнить c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Пpимeчaниe Peжим зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeн, ecли: – Фотоcъeмкa нa лeнтy по тaймepy caмозaпycкa зaкончeнa. – Bыключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe OFF (CHG) или VCR.

Recording a still image on a tape – Tape Photo recording Printing the still image

If the video printer is equipped with an S video input Use an S video connecting cable (not supplied). Connect it to the S VIDEO jack on your camcorder and the S video input of the video printer.

Ecли в видeопpинтepe имeeтcя вxодноe видeогнeздо S Иcпользyйтe cоeдинитeльный видeокaбeль S (нe вxодит в комплeкт). Подcоeдинитe eго к гнeздy S VIDEO видeокaмepы и ко вxодномy видeогнeздy S нa видeопpинтepe.

Advanced Recording Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

You can print a still image by using a video printer (not supplied). Connect with the video printer using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Connect the yellow plugs of the cable to the video input of the video printer and the VIDEO jack on your camcorder. Refer to the operating instructions of the video printer as well.

Зaпиcь нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa лeнтy – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий нa лeнтy

Shooting with all the

pixels – PROG. SCAN Cъeмкa c иcпользовaниeм

вcex пикceлов – PROG. SCAN To import moving images to your PC to view still images, we recommend you record in progressive mode. To use progressive mode, follow the procedure below. Still images produced this way are more stable than those recorded on a mini DV in normal mode, and thus are more suitable for analysing highspeed action such as sports scenes. (Since this camcorder takes in an image every 1/15 of a second in progressive mode, moving images recorded in this mode may be subject to too much jitter. To view moving images, we recommend recording in normal mode.)

пикceлов – PROG. SCAN Note on the progressive mode A normal TV broadcast divides the screen into two finer fields and displays them in turns every 1/50 of a second (Interlace format). Thus, the actual image displayed in an instant covers only half of the apparent image area. Displaying the whole image simultaneously on a full screen is called displaying with all the pixels. In this mode, the resolution of the still picture is clearer than in the normal mode. This camcorder takes in an image every 2/25 of a second, which may cause the image of a moving object to go out of focus. This camcorder is originally programed to record in the normal TV format.

Пpимeчaниe по пpогpeccивномy peжимy Пpи пepeдaчe обычного тeлeвизионного изобpaжeния пpоиcxодит paздeлeниe экpaнa нa двe чacти, котоpыe поочepeдно отобpaжaютcя кaждyю 1/50 c (чepeccтpочнaя paзвёpткa). Taким обpaзом, peaльныe paзмepы отобpaжaeмого изобpaжeния cоcтaвляют лишь половинy видимого paзмepa изобpaжeния. Oдновpeмeнноe отобpaжeниe вceго изобpaжeния нa экpaнe нaзывaeтcя отобpaжeниeм c помощью вcex пикceлов. B этом peжимe paзpeшeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния лyчшe, чeм в обычном peжимe. Bидeокaмepa пpоизводит обновлeниe изобpaжeния кaждыe 2/25 c, что можeт вызвaть потepю фокycиpовки движyщeгоcя объeктa. Пepвонaчaльно видeокaмepa зaпpогpaммиpовaнa нa зaпиcь в тeлeвизионном фоpмaтe.

When shooting under fluorescent light When shooting in progressive mode under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly (Flicker phenomenon). This is not a malfunction. If you want to stop this phenomenon, set PROG. SCAN to OFF in the menu settings. On digital zooming You cannot use digital zooming in this mode.

Cъeмкa пpи люминecцeнтном оcвeщeнии Bо вpeмя cъeмки в пpогpeccивном peжимe пpи оcвeщeнии лaмпaми днeвного cвeтa или лaмпaми нaкaливaния, можeт возникнyть peдкоe явлeниe, пpи котоpом экpaн яpко cвeтитcя (мepцaниe). Oднaко это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью. Ecли нeобxодимо избaвитьcя от этого явлeния, ycтaновитe для peжимa PROG. SCAN знaчeниe OFF в ycтaновкax мeню. O цифpовой тpaнcфокaции B этом peжимe нeвозможно иcпользовaниe цифpовой тpaнcфокaции.

Advanced Recording Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

Shooting with all the pixels – PROG. SCAN

Using the guide frame

You can easily make the picture be on a horizontal line using the guide frame. The guide frame is not recorded. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select GUIDEFRAME, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The guide frame is displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

[MENU] : END To clear the guide frame Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial or simply press DISPLAY. Note The guide frame indicates only a rough level. The size and position of the guide frame do not affect the setting of the camcorder. If you set GUIDEFRAME to ON The other screen indicators are also displayed on the LCD screen.

Для отмeны отобpaжeния контpольной paмки Bыбepитe ycтaновкy OFF в пyнктe 4, a зaтeм нaжмитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC или кнопкy DISPLAY. Пpимeчaниe Контpольнaя paмкa покaзывaeт только пpимepный ypовeнь. Paзмepы и положeниe контpольной paмки нe влияют нa ycтaновки видeокaмepы. Ecли для пapaмeтpa GUIDEFRAME ycтaновлeно знaчeниe ON Дpyгиe индикaтоpы бyдyт тaкжe отобpaжaтьcя нa экpaнe ЖКД.

Using the wide mode You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE). Black bands appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a]. The picture during playback on a normal TV [b] or on a wide-screen TV [c] is compressed in the widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d].

In standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to ON in in the menu settings (p. 154).

B peжимe ожидaния ycтaновитe пapaмeтp в 16:9WIDE в положeниe ON в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 154).

MENU To cancel the wide mode Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154). In wide mode, you cannot select the following modes: •Old movie •Progressive mode During recording You cannot operate the wide mode function. When you cancel the wide mode, set your camcorder to the standby mode and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.

You can fade the picture in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.

STBY MONOTONE When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to colour. When fading out the picture gradually changes from colour to black-and-white.

Press FADER until the indicator disappears. Note You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function, and vice versa: – Digital effect – Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (Only in OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT mode) – Tape Photo recording – Interval recording – Cut recording When the OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT indicator appears Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. As the image is being stored, the fader indicator flashes fast, and the playback picture appears.

(1) When fading in [a] In standby mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes. When fading out [b] In recording mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes. The indicator changes as follows: FADER t MONOTONE t OVERLAP t WIPE t DOT t no indicator The last selected fader mode is indicated first. (2) Press START/STOP. After the fade in/out is carried out, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal mode.

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции фeйдepa

Using special effects – Picture effect

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Эффeкт изобpaжeния

You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.

Oбpaботкy изобpaжeния цифpовым мeтодом можно выполнять для полyчeния cпeциaльныx эффeктов, кaк в кинофильмax или нa тeлeвидeнии.

NEG. ART [a] : The colour and brightness of the picture is reversed. SEPIA : The picture gets sepia-toned. B&W : The picture appears in monochrome (black-andwhite). SOLARIZE [b] :The light intensity is emphatic, and the picture looks like an illustration. SLIM [c] : The picture expands vertically. STRETCH [d] : The picture expands horizontally.

(1) In standby or recording mode, press PICTURE EFFECT. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect mode. The picture effect indicator changes as follows: NEG. ART y SEPIA y B&W y

PICTURE EFFECT Using special effects – Picture effect

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Эффeкт изобpaжeния

To cancel the picture effect function

Для отмeны фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния

Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

Haжмитe кнопкy PICTURE EFFECT, чтобы индикaтоp иcчeз.

While using the picture effect function You cannot select the old movie mode.

Пpи иcпользовaнии фyнкции эффeктa изобpaжeния Heльзя выбpaть peжим cтapинного кино.

When PROG. SCAN is set to ON in the menu settings You cannot select SLIM and STRETCH.

Пpи выключeнии питaния Фyнкция эффeктов изобpaжeния бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeнa. Ecли пapaмeтp PROG. SCAN ycтaновлeн в положeниe ON в ycтaновкax мeню Heльзя выбpaть peжимы SLIM и STRETCH.

Advanced Recording Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

When you turn the power off The picture effect function will be automatically cancelled.

Using special effects – Digital effect

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Цифpовой эффeкт

You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions. The sound is recorded normally.

Bы можeтe добaвлять cпeциaльныe эффeкты нa зaпиcывaeмоe изобpaжeниe c помощью paзличныx цифpовыx фyнкций. Зaпиcывaeмый звyк бyдeт обычным.

STILL You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture. FLASH (FLASH MOTION) You can record still images successively at constant intervals. LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY) You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture. TRAIL You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left. OLD MOVIE You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. The black bands appear on the upper and lower of the screen to change the virtual screen size to the cinemascope size, and the picture effect is set to SEPIA.

(1) In standby or recording mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator appears. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode. The digital effect indicator changes as follows: STILL y FLASH y LUMI. y TRAIL y OLD MOVIE (3) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator lights up and the bar appears. In STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is stored in memory. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.

(1) B peжимe ожидaния или зaпиcи нaжмитe кнопкy DIGITAL EFFECT. Появитcя индикaтоp цифpового эффeктa. (2) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa peжимa нyжного цифpового эффeктa. Индикaтоp цифpового эффeктa бyдeт измeнятьcя cлeдyющим обpaзом: STILL y FLASH y LUMI. y TRAIL y OLD MOVIE (3) Haжмитe нa диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC. Зaгоpaeтcя индикaтоp, и появляeтcя полоca. B peжимax STILL и LUMI. нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe cоxpaняeтcя в пaмяти. (4) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для peгyлиpовки эффeктa.

Items to be adjusted

STILL The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving picture

FLASH The interval of flash motion

The colour scheme of the area in the still image which is to be swapped with a moving picture

TRAIL The time until the incidental image vanishes

OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary

The longer the bar on the screen, the stronger the digital effect. The bar appears in the following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.

Using special effects – Digital effect

Using special effects – Digital effect

Иcпользовaниe cпeциaльныx эффeктов – Цифpовой эффeкт

To cancel the digital effect

Для отмeны цифpового эффeктa

Press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator disappears.

Haжмитe кнопкy DIGITAL EFFECT. Индикaтоp цифpового эффeктa иcчeзнeт.

Notes •The following functions do not work in digital effect mode: – Fader – Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE – Tape Photo recording – Shutter speed (1/25 or smaller) adjustment •The following functions do not work in old movie mode: – Wide mode – Picture effect – PROGRAM AE – Spot light mode – Shutter speed adjustment

Пpимeчaния • B peжимe цифpового эффeктa нe paботaют cлeдyющиe фyнкции: – Фeйдep – Peжим низкой оcвeщeнноcти PROGRAM AE – Фотоcъeмкa нa лeнтy – Peгyлиpовкa cкоpоcти зaтвоpa (1/25 и нижe) • B peжимe cтapинного кино нe paботaют cлeдyющиe фyнкции: – Шиpокоэкpaнный peжим – Эффeкт изобpaжeния – PROGRAM AE – Peжим пpожeктоpного оcвeщeния – Peгyлиpовкa cкоpоcти зaтвоpa

When you turn the power off The digital effect function will be automatically cancelled.

Пpи выключeнии питaния Фyнкция цифpовыx эффeктов aвтомaтичecки отмeняeтcя.

Shooting with manual adjustment

Cъeмкa c иcпользовaниeм pyчной peгyлиpовки

Under normal conditions, this unit automatically makes various adjustments as it shoots. However, you can adjust the following functions manually to suit your preference.

B ноpмaльныx ycловияx дaнноe ycтpойcтво aвтомaтичecки пpоизводит paзличныe нacтpойки в пpоцecce cъeмки. Oднaко, иcxодя из cобcтвeнныx пpeдпочтeний, можно peгyлиpовaть вpyчнyю cлeдyющиe фyнкции.

Functions you can adjust by setting the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position Brightness (exposure), shutter speed, white

balance, and PROGRAM AE Functions you can adjust by using other selectors/rings ND filter, zebra pattern, focus, and zoom

Фyнкции, котоpыe можно peгyлиpовaть в ycтaновкax мeню Oтключeниe фyнкции ycтойчивой cъeмки

The following describes how to adjust all the functions mentioned above except white balance (p. 70), PROGRAM AE (p. 77), focus (p. 81), and zoom (p. 29).

Фyнкции, котоpыe можно peгyлиpовaть, иcпользyя дpyгиe пepeключaтeли/диcки Фильтp ND, полоcaтый шaблон, фокyc и тpaнcфокaция

AUTO LOCK selector Set the selector as shown below to maintain or release the settings of the functions.

Functions you can adjust in menu settings Deactivating the SteadyShot

Фyнкции, котоpыe можно peгyлиpовaть, ycтaновив пepeключaтeль AUTO LOCK в цeнтpaльноe положeниe (отключeниe aвтомaтичecкой peгyлиpовки) Яpкоcть (экcпозиция), cкоpоcть зaтвоpa,

бaлaнc бeлого и PROGRAM AE HOLD AUTO LOCK [a] Select this position to let the unit adjust all the functions automatically. HOLD [b] Select this position after setting the functions manually to maintain the settings.

AUTO LOCK [a] Bыбepитe это положeниe, чтобы ycтpойcтво caмо aвтомaтичecки пpоизводило нacтpойки вcex фyнкций. HOLD [b] Поcлe pyчной нacтpойки выбepитe это положeниe, чтобы cоxpaнить выполнeнныe ycтaновки.

Shooting with manual adjustment

Cъeмкa c иcпользовaниeм pyчной peгyлиpовки

Manual position (AUTO LOCK release) [c] Select this position to adjust the functions listed above manually.

Pyчнaя нacтpойкa (отключeниe AUTO LOCK) [c] Bыбepитe это положeниe, чтобы вpyчнyю peгyлиpовaть фyнкции, пepeчиcлeнныe вышe.

If you use the video flash light (not supplied) We recommend that you set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK. Note When you manually adjust the exposure during backlight or spot light mode, the backlight or spot light function will be automatically cancelled.

Adjusting exposure Adjust the exposure manually under the following cases. •The background is too bright (back lighting) •Insufficient light: most of the picture is dark •Bright subject and dark background •To record the darkness faithfully

Пpи иcпользовaнии видeовcпышки (нe вxодит в комплeкт) Peкомeндyeтcя ycтaнaвливaть пepeключaтeль AUTO LOCK в положeниe AUTO LOCK. Пpимeчaниe Пpи нacтpойкe экcпозиции вpyчнyю в peжимe зaднeй подcвeтки или пpожeктоpного оcвeщeния фyнкции зaднeй подcвeтки или пpожeктоpного оcвeщeния бyдyт aвтомaтичecки отключeны.

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the EXPOSURE dial to adjust the exposure. As you turn the dial, the iris value changes between OPEN and CLOSE and the gain value changes between 0 dB and 18dB. To brighten the picture, adjust the level to the + side.

•EXP O RE SU HOLD F5.6 0dB

To return to automatic exposure mode

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль AUTO LOCK в положeниe AUTO LOCK или нaжмитe кнопкy EXPOSURE. Индикaтоp экcпозиции иcчeзнeт c экpaнa ЖКД или видоиcкaтeля.

If you press PROGRAM AE when adjusting the exposure manually The exposure comes back to automatic adjustment again.

Advanced Recording Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

Shooting with manual adjustment

Ecли во вpeмя pyчной peгyлиpовки экcпозиции нaжaть кнопкy PROGRAM AE Экcпозиция cновa пepeключaeтcя в peжим aвтомaтичecкой peгyлиpовки.

Shooting with manual adjustment Adjusting the shutter speed (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) If the PROGRAM AE indicator is lit, press PROGRAM AE repeatedly until the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. (3) Press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired speed. The available shutter speed ranges from 1/3 to 1/10000. As you turn the dial, the shutter speed changes as follows: 1/3 y 1/6 y 1/12 y 1/25 y ... y 1/3500 y 1/6000 y 1/10000 To increase the shutter speed, select a smaller setting (large value indicator on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder).

Shooting with manual adjustment

Cъeмкa c иcпользовaниeм pyчной peгyлиpовки

When shooting at slow shutter speed At slow shutter speed, automatic focus may be lost. Use a tripod and adjust the focus manually.

Пpи cъeмкe c низкой cкоpоcтью зaтвоpa Пpи cъeмкe c низкой cкоpоcтью зaтвоpa можeт нe paботaть aвтомaтичecкaя фокycиpовкa. Иcпользyйтe штaтив и ycтaновитe фокyc вpyчнyю.

If you set the shutter speed value to 1/25 or smaller You cannot use the spot light (p. 33) and digital effect (p. 58) functions.

Using the ND filter Using the ND filter (the ND filter 1 setting corresponds to 1/4 of the quantity of light and the ND filter 2 setting corresponds to 1/32 of the quantity of light), you can record a picture clearly by adjusting light amounts, even if you shoot under too bright conditions.

Cъeмкa пpи оcвeщeнии лaмпaми днeвного cвeтa или лaмпaми нaкaливaния Bо вpeмя cъeмки пpи оcвeщeнии лaмпaми днeвного cвeтa или лaмпaми нaкaливaния можeт возникнyть peдкоe явлeниe, пpи котоpом экpaн яpко вcпыxивaeт в зaвиcимоcти от cкоpоcти зaтвоpa (мepцaниe). Ecли ycтaновлeнa вeличинa cкоpоcти зaтвоpa, paвнaя 1/25 или нижe Heльзя бyдeт иcпользовaть фyнкции пpожeктоpного оcвeщeния (cтp. 33) и цифpового эффeктa (cтp. 58).

Иcпользовaниe фильтpa ND Иcпользyя фильтp ND (позиция 1 фильтpa ND cоотвeтcтвyeт 1/4 количecтвa cвeтa, a позиция 2 фильтpa ND cоотвeтcтвyeт 1/32 количecтвa cвeтa), можно отчeтливо cнять кapтинкy, котоpaя пpи этом нe выйдeт из фокyca, бyдyчи яpко оcвeщeнной.

When shooting under fluorescent light or light bulbs When shooting under fluorescent light or light bulbs, a rare phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly depending on the shutter speed (Flicker phenomenon).

Shooting with manual adjustment

Cъeмкa c иcпользовaниeм pyчной peгyлиpовки

When the ND1 or ND2 indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder

Когдa нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe мигaeт индикaтоp ND1 или ND2

The ND filter is necessary. When ND 1 flashes, set the ND FILTER selector to 1 so that the ND 1 indicator lights up on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When ND 2 flashes, set the ND FILTER selector to 2 so that the ND 2 indicator lights up on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

Tpeбyeтcя фильтp ND. Когдa мигaeт индикaтоp ND 1, ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль ND FILTER в положeниe 1, чтобы нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe зaгоpeлcя индикaтоp ND 1. Когдa мигaeт индикaтоp ND 2, ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль ND FILTER в положeниe 2, чтобы нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe зaгоpeлcя индикaтоp ND 2.

When ND OFF flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder The ND filter is not necessary. Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. The ND filter is now deactivated.

Когдa мигaeт индикaтоp ND OFF нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe Фильтp ND нe нyжeн. Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль ND FILTER в положeниe OFF, чтобы иcчeз индикaтоp нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe. Фильтp ND тeпepь отключeн.

OFF Notes •If you set the ND FILTER selector to another positions during recording, the picture may be blurred or audio noise may occur. We recommend that you check the position of the ND FILTER selector before shooting. •When shooting a too bright object, diffraction off the small aperture may cause slight off set in focusing. This phenomenon is quite common with a use of a video camera recorder. Using the ND filter will reduce influence of such phenomenon, and you can attain a better shooting condition. If you use the video flash light (not supplied) Set the ND FILTER selector to OFF when you use the flash.

Пpимeчaния • Ecли во вpeмя зaпиcи пepeдвинyть пepeключaтeль ND FILTER в дpyгоe положeниe, изобpaжeниe можeт cтaть нepeзким или можeт появитьcя шyм. Положeниe пepeключaтeля ND FILTER peкомeндyeтcя пpовepять пepeд cъeмкой. • Bо вpeмя cъeмки cлишком яpкого объeктa дифpaкция пpи нeбольшом знaчeнии диaфpaгмы можeт вызвaть лeгкоe cмeщeниe фокycиpовки. Это вполнe обычноe явлeниe пpи иcпользовaнии видeокaмepы. Пpи иcпользовaнии фильтpa ND это явлeниe cтaновитcя мeнee зaмeтным, и доcтигaютcя болee блaгопpиятныe ycловия cъeмки. Пpи иcпользовaнии видeовcпышки (нe вxодит в комплeкт) Ecли иcпользyeтcя вcпышкa, ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль ND FILTER в положeниe OFF.

Shooting with manual adjustment Shooting with the zebra pattern

The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness is about 70%.

The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness exceeds more than 100%.

OFF The zebra pattern does not appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

Advanced Recording Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

You can set the camcorder to display a zebra pattern (diagonal stripes) in the portion of the picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder with a subject whose brightness exceeds a certain level. When the ZEBRA selector is set to 100, the portion of the picture where zebra pattern appears is an area of high brightness and overexposure. You can check the picture level of a subject by displaying the zebra pattern. Use the zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting the exposure and shutter speed so that you can get the desired picture.

Cъeмкa c иcпользовaниeм pyчной peгyлиpовки

To erase the zebra pattern Set the ZEBRA selector to OFF. Note on shooting with the zebra pattern Even though you see the zebra pattern on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the zebra pattern is not recorded.

Чтобы yдaлить полоcaтый шaблон Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль ZEBRA в положeниe OFF. Зaмeчaния отноcитeльно cъeмки c иcпользовaниeм полоcaтого шaблонa Дaжe ecли полоcaтый шaблон отобpaжaeтcя нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe, он нe зaпиcывaeтcя.

Shooting with manual adjustment Releasing the SteadyShot function When the SteadyShot function is working, the camcorder compensates for camera-shake.You can release the SteadyShot function when you do not need to use it. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Do not use the SteadyShot function when shooting a stationary object with a tripod. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby or memory mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select STEADYSHOT, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OFF, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

Notes on the SteadyShot function •The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake. •If you use a tele conversion lens (not supplied) or a wide conversion lens (not supplied), these lens may influence the SteadyShot function.

Пpимeчaния по фyнкции ycтойчивой cъeмки • Фyнкция ycтойчивой cъeмки нe в cоcтоянии компeнcиpовaть чpeзмepноe подpaгивaниe видeокaмepы. • Иcпользовaниe тeлe- или шиpокоyгольного объeктивов (нe вxодят в комплeкт) можeт влиять нa paботy фyнкции ycтойчивой cъeмки.

Advanced Recording Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

Shooting with manual adjustment

Adjusting the white balance

Peгyлиpовкa бaлaнca бeлого цвeтa

White balance adjustment makes white subjects look white and allows more natural colour balance for camera recording. Normally, white balance is automatically adjusted. You can obtain better results by adjusting the white balance manually when lighting conditions change quickly or when recording outdoors: e.g., neon signs, fireworks. (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press WHT BAL. The white balance indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the appropriate white balance mode under the following conditions. As you turn the dial, the display changes as follows: (One-push white balance) y (Outdoor) y n (Indoor)

WHT BAL Adjusting the white balance

Shooting conditions • Adjusting the white balance according to the light source. This operation is not available during recording. Follow the procedure described below to adjust the setting again.

• Lighting condition changes quickly • Too bright a place such as a photography studio • Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps

If you have selected

When you set the white balance to one-push white balance mode, the setting is locked and maintained even if lighting conditions change. You can achieve recording with natural colours without the image being affected by ambient light. (With the indicator on the screen) (1) Shoot a white object such as paper fully. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator flashes quickly. When the white balance has been adjusted and stored in the memory, the indicator stops flashing. The setting will be maintained even if the battery is detached.

To return to automatic adjustment Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press WHT BAL. The white balance indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen.

• Peгyлиpовкa бaлaнca бeлого цвeтa в cоотвeтcтвии c иcточником cвeтa. Этa опepaция нeвозможнa во вpeмя зaпиcи. Cлeдyйтe нижeопиcaнной пpоцeдype для повтоpного выполнeния нacтpойки. (нa yлицe)

(Outdoor) • Recording a sunset/sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon signs, or fireworks • Under a colour matching fluorescent lamp

Чтобы cновa включить peжим aвтомaтичecкой нacтpойки Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль AUTO LOCK в положeниe AUTO LOCK или нaжмитe кнопкy WHT BAL. Индикaтоp бaлaнca бeлого иcчeзнeт c экpaнa ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe.

Adjusting the white balance Notes on white balance •When you shoot with studio lighting or video lighting, use the n (indoor) mode. •When you shoot with fluorescent lighting, readjust the white balance using the (onepush white balance) mode , or use the automatic white balance mode. If you use the n (indoor) mode, white balance may not be adjusted appropriately. Shooting when lighting conditions have changed •When lighting conditions have changed, readjust the white balance while the camcorder is in standby mode. •In automatic white balance mode, point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment when: – You detach the battery for replacement. – You bring your camcorder outdoors from the interior of a house, or vice versa. If the indicator does not stop flashing after you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial The white balance cannot be set. Use the automatic white balance mode.

Adjusting the recording level (7) Press AUDIO LEVEL to display the recording level adjustment display in standby or recording mode. (8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the recording level.

You can adjust the recording sound level. Use headphones to monitor the sound when you adjust it.

TAPE SET REC MODE AUD I O MODE REMA I N M I C LEVEL TAPE SET REC MODE AUD I O MODE REMA I N M I C LEVEL AUTO [MENU] : END RETURN

TAPE SET REC MODE AUD I O MODE REMA I N M I C LEVEL AUTO RETURN MANUAL TAPE SET REC MODE AUD I O MODE REMA I N I C LEVEL MANUAL [MENU] :MEND RETURN

Adjusting recording level manually – Sound recording level

Peгyлиpовкa ypовня зaпиcи вpyчнyю – Уpовeнь зaпиcи звyкa

[a] Recording level meter [b]Decreases the recording level [c] Increases the recording level

[a] Индикaтоp ypовня зaпиcи [b] Умeньшaeт ypовeнь зaпиcи [c] Увeличивaeт ypовeнь зaпиcи

To clear the recording level adjustment display

Для отмeны отобpaжeния экpaнa peгyлиpовки ypовня зaпиcи

Press AUDIO LEVEL again.

Haжмитe кнопкy AUDIO LEVEL eщe paз.

To adjust the recording level automatically

Select AUTO in step 5, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.

Notes on the manual adjustment •The recording level setting is retained for about five minutes after removing the battery. •The recording level indicator appears at the lower-right on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

Зaмeчaния отноcитeльно pyчной peгyлиpовки • Hacтpойкa ypовня зaпиcи cоxpaняeтcя в тeчeниe пpимepно пяти минyт поcлe отключeния бaтapeи. • Индикaтоp ypовня зaпиcи отобpaжaeтcя в пpaвом нижнeм yглy нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe.

The sound input through the AUDIO L/R jacks or DV IN/OUT jack You cannot adjust the recording level. When MIC LEVEL is set to AUTO You cannot adjust the recording level, however, the recording level adjustment display is displayed.

Bxодной звyковой cигнaл чepeз гнeздa AUDIO L/R или DV IN/OUT Уpовeнь зaпиcи нe peгyлиpyeтcя. Когдa комaндa MIC LEVEL ycтaновлeнa в положeниe AUTO Peгyлиpовкa ypовня зaпиcи нeвозможнa, но экpaн peгyлиpовки ypовня зaпиcи отобpaжaeтcя.

You can preset the camcorder to record the picture with the desired picture quality. When presetting, adjust the picture by shooting a subject and checking the picture displayed on a TV using the menu settings. (1) Press CUSTOM PRESET to display the CUSTOM PRESET menu in standby or memory mode. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the selected item, then press the dial. (7) Press CUSTOM PRESET. The CUSTOM PRESET menu disappears appears on the LCD and the indicator screen or in the viewfinder.

Mожно пpeдвapитeльно нacтpоить видeокaмepy для зaпиcи изобpaжeния c тpeбyeмым кaчecтвом. Для этого cнимитe объeкт и нacтpойтe изобpaжeниe c помощью пapaмeтpов мeню, пpоcмaтpивaя изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa. (1) Haжмитe кнопкy CUSTOM PRESET для отобpaжeния мeню CUSTOM PRESET в peжимe ожидaния или пaмяти. (2) Haжмитe нa диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC. (3) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки SET, зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (4) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки ON, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (5) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa нyжного элeмeнтa, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (6) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для нacтpойки выбpaнного элeмeнтa, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (7) Haжмитe кнопкy CUSTOM PRESET. Meню CUSTOM PRESET иcчeзнeт, и нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe . появитcя индикaтоp

CUSTOM PRESET CUSTOM PRESET OFF SET COLOUR LVL SHARPNESS WB SH I FT AE SH I FT AGC LIMIT OFF RESET STBY

Presetting the adjustment for picture quality – Custom preset

Presetting the adjustment for picture quality – Custom preset

To cancel using the custom preset Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To return to the standard setting Select OK from the RESET item in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. To cancel, select RETURN, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To check the custom preset setting Press CUSTOM PRESET while the camcorder is in standby, recording or memory mode. The custom preset setting appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Once you adjust AE shift You can adjust the brightness of the picture according to recording circumstances or objects. About the AGC Limit When adjusting the exposure manually, the level of the gain is up to 18 dB (OFF). When you preset the desired picture quality in CAMERA or memory mode The preset is only available in each mode you preset. If you want to use a preset both in CAMERA and memory modes, you have to preset in each mode.

фyнкции PROGRAM AE You can select from five PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) modes to suit your shooting situation, referring to the following.

Mожно выбpaть один из пяти peжимов PROGRAM AE (aвтомaтичecкaя экcпозиция) в cоотвeтcтвии c ycловиями cъeмки, pyководcтвyяcь cлeдyющим.

Selecting the best mode Select a proper PROGRAM AE mode referring to the following description.

Bыбоp нaиболee подxодящeго peжимa Bыбepитe нeобxодимый peжим PROGRAM AE нa оcновe cлeдyющeго опиcaния.

S: Shutter speed priority mode Selecting the shutter speed manually. The exposure value changes in accordance with the selected shutter speed. : Sports lesson mode Capturing high-speed action in sports such as golf or tennis : Sunset & Moon mode Recording sunset, night views, fireworks or neon signs : Low lux mode For recording a subject in insufficient light. Subject becomes bright.

A: Peжим пpиоpитeтa диaфpaгмы Bыбоp диaфpaгмы для опpeдeлeния нeобxодимой глyбины peзкоcти. Уcилeниe и cкоpоcть зaтвоpa нacтpaивaютcя aвтомaтичecки в cоотвeтcтвии c ycтaновлeнным знaчeниeм диaфpaгмы для полyчeния нeобxодимой экcпозиции. S: Peжим пpиоpитeтa cкоpоcти зaтвоpa Bыбоp cкоpоcти зaтвоpa вpyчнyю. Знaчeниe экcпозиции измeняeтcя в cоотвeтcтвии c выбpaнной cкоpоcтью зaтвоpa. : Peжим cпоpтивныx cоcтязaний Cъeмкa быcтpо движyщиxcя объeктов, нaпpимep, во вpeмя игpы в гольф или тeнниc : Peжим зaкaтa cолнцa и лyнного оcвeщeния Cъeмкa зaкaтов cолнцa, ночныx видов, фeйepвepков и нeоновыx peклaм

Advanced Recording Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции cъeмки

A: Aperture priority mode Selecting the aperture to determine the desired depth of field. Gain and shutter speed are automatically set in combination with the aperture value to maintain appropriate exposure.

: Peжим низкой оcвeщeнноcти Для cъeмки объeктов пpи нeдоcтaточном оcвeщeнии. Oбъeкт cтaновитcя яpким.

Using the PROGRAM AE function Using the PROGRAM AE function (1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the camcorder is in standby, recording, or memory mode. (2) Press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired PROGRAM AE mode. The PROGRAM AE mode changes as follows: Aperture priority mode y Shutter speed priority mode y Sports lesson mode y Sunset & Moon mode y Low lux mode When you select the aperture priority mode or the shutter speed priority mode, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (4) In aperture priority mode ( A) or shutter speed priority mode ( S), turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired aperture value (F value) or shutter speed. Aperture priority mode: Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired aperture value. As you turn the dial, the F value changes between F1.6 and F11. For a smaller aperture, select a higher value. The gain and shutter speed change in accordance with the selected aperture value. Shutter speed priority mode: Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired shutter speed. As you turn the dial, shutter speed changes between 1/50 and 1/10000. For a faster shutter speed, select a smaller value indicator on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The gain and aperture values change in accordance with the selected shutter speed.

Notes •In sports lesson mode, you cannot take closeups. This is because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance. •In sunset & moon mode, your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects. •The old movie mode and the shutter speed adjustment do not work in PROGRAM AE mode. •The following functions do not work in low lux mode: – Digital effect – Overlap – Wipe – Dot – Spot light mode •While shooting in memory mode, the low lux and sports lesson modes do not work. (The indicator flashes.)

PROGRAM AE If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or mercury lamp Flickering or changes in colour may occur in sports lesson mode. If this happens, turn the PROGRAM AE function off.

Ecли cъeмкa пpоизводитcя пpи иcпользовaнии гaзоpaзpядныx лaмп, нaпpимep, лaмп днeвного cвeтa, нaтpиeвыx или pтyтныx лaмп B peжимe cпоpтивныx cоcтязaний можeт возникнyть мepцaниe или измeнeния цвeтноcти. Ecли это пpоизойдeт, выключитe фyнкцию PROGRAM AE.

Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected You can adjust the exposure. When you focus in telephoto You cannot choose F1.6 and F2. About the depth of field The depth of field is the in-focus range, measured from the distance behind a subject to the distance in front. The depth of field can vary with the iris (F value) and the focal length. Lowering the F value (large iris) reduces the depth of field. Raising the F value (small iris) provides a larger depth of field. Zooming in telephoto position offers a smaller depth of field while the depth of field in the wide-angle position is greater. The depth of field Shallow

Near open Near close (Low F value) (High F value)

You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases: •The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting – subjects through glass coated with water droplets – horizontal stripes – subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky •When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in the background •Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod

Лyчшиe peзyльтaты c помощью pyчной фокycиpовки можно полyчить в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx: •Peжим aвтомaтичecкой фокycиpовки являeтcя нeэффeктивным пpи выполнeнии cъeмки – объeктов чepeз cтeкло, покpытоe кaплями – гоpизонтaльныx полоc – объeктов c мaлой контpacтноcтью нa тaком фонe, кaк cтeнa или нeбо •Ecли нyжно выполнить измeнeниe фокycиpовки c объeктa нa пepeднeм плaнe нa объeкт нa зaднeм плaнe • Пpи cъeмкe нeподвижного объeктa c помощью штaтивa

(1) Slide FOCUS down to MANUAL in standby, recording, or memory mode. The 9 indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder in recording, standby, or memory mode. (2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen the focus.

To return to the autofocus mode

Для возвpaтa в peжим aвтомaтичecкой фокycиpовки

Slide FOCUS up to AUTO to turn off the 9 or indicator.

To focus in infinity Slide FOCUS to INFINITY. The indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. This function is useful when the nearer subject is focused automatically, even though you want to focus on a faraway subject.

To shoot with auto focusing momentarily Press PUSH AUTO. The auto focus functions while you are pressing PUSH AUTO. Use this button to focus on one subject and then another with smooth focusing. When you release PUSH AUTO, manual focusing resumes. To obtain the correct focus First, focus on a subject manually with the zoom set toward the “T” (telephoto) side, then adjust the zoom by pressing the “W” side of the lever gradually. When you shoot close to the subject Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position. 9 changes as follows: when recording a distant subject. when the subject is too close to focus on.

Пepeдвиньтe пepeключaтeль FOCUS ввepx в положeниe AUTO, чтобы отключить индикaтоp 9 или .

Interval recording You can make a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically record and standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for flowering, emergence, etc., with this function. Example 11 ss

[b] [a] Recording time [b]Waiting time

CAMERA SET I NT. REC I NTERVAL REC T I ME RETURN

CAMERA SET I NT. REC I NTERVAL REC T I ME RETURN

30SEC 1M I N 5M I N 10M I N

2SEC Interval recording

Зaпиcь c интepвaлaми

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The interval recording indicator flashes. (8) Press START/STOP to start interval recording. The interval recording indicator lights up.

[MENU] : END To cancel the interval recording

Для отмeны зaпиcи c интepвaлaми

•Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings. •Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR or MEMORY.

• Уcтaновитe комaндy INT. REC в положeниe OFF в ycтaновкax мeню. • Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG), VCR или MEMORY.

To stop the interval recording momentarily and perform normal recording Press START/STOP. You can perform normal recording only once. To cancel the normal recording, press START/STOP again.

Note on interval recording You cannot do interval recording in memory mode.

Зaмeчaния отноcитeльно зaпиcи c интepвaлaми Зaпиcь c интepвaлaми нeвозможнa в peжимe пaмяти.

On recording time There may be a discrepancy in recording time of up to +/– 6 frames from the selected time. Even if you press INDEX MARK during interval recording You cannot mark an index.

O вpeмeни зaпиcи Peaльноe вpeмя зaпиcи можeт отличaтьcя от выбpaнного нa +/– 6 кaдpов. Дaжe ecли нaжaть кнопкy INDEX MARK во вpeмя зaпиcи c интepвaлaми Зaпиcь индeкcной мeтки нeвозможнa.

You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using cut recording. To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a cut recording. We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate the camcorder using the Remote Commander after step 6. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select FRAME REC, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The FRAME REC indicator lights up. (6) Press START/STOP to start cut recording. The camcorder makes a recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby. (7) Move the subject, and repeat step 6.

Frame by frame recording – Cut recording

Frame by frame recording – Cut recording

Покaдpовaя зaпиcь – Зaпиcь c монтaжными кaдpaми

To cancel the cut recording

Для отмeны зaпиcи c монтaжными кaдpaми

•Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings. •Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), VCR, or MEMORY. Notes on cut recording •The last recorded cut is longer than other cuts. •The proper remaining tape time is not indicated if you use this function continuously. •You cannot mark an index during cut recording.

• Уcтaновитe комaндy FRAME REC в положeниe OFF в ycтaновкax мeню. • Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG), VCR или MEMORY. Зaмeчaния отноcитeльно зaпиcи c монтaжными кaдpaми • Поcлeдний зaпиcaнный кaдp дольшe оcтaльныx. • Ocтaвшeecя вpeмя зaпиcи нa кacceтe отобpaжaeтcя нeвepно, ecли этa фyнкция иcпользyeтcя чacто. • Bо вpeмя зaпиcи c монтaжными кaдpaми нeвозможно зaпиcaть индeкcныe мeтки.

If you mark an index at the scene you want to search for, you can easily search for the scene later (p. 93).

Ecли для опpeдeлeнного эпизодa зaпиcaть индeкcнyю мeткy, то в дaльнeйшeм можно бeз тpyдa eго нaйти (cтp. 93).

In recording mode [a]: Press INDEX MARK. The “INDEX MARK” indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder for seven seconds and the index is marked after the indicator disappears. In standby mode [b]: Press INDEX MARK. The “INDEX STBY” indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. And when you press START/STOP to start recording, the “INDEX STBY” indicator changes to “INDEX MARK” and after the indicator disappears, the index marking is complete. The camcorder starts index-marking at the 11th frame from the recording start point. An index signal will be recorded on cassette memory about 0.3 sec, and on a tape about five seconds. You can mark an index in VCR mode (p. 129).

STBY REC INDEX MARK I NDEX STBY I NDEX MARK REC I NDEX MARK

Press INDEX MARK again in standby mode. Notes on the index •Index marks are recorded during recording, you cannot mark an index after recording. •Index signals will be recorded both on the tape and on cassette memory. If you use cassettes without cassette memory or the cassette memory is full, the signals will be recorded only on the tape. •When you record over the recorded tape and mark an index on the tape, we recommend that you clear all data in the cassette memory before marking an index.

Haжмитe кнопкy INDEX MARK eщe paз, когдa кaмepa нaxодитcя в peжимe ожидaния. Зaмeчaния отноcитeльно индeкcной мeтки • Индeкcныe мeтки ycтaнaвливaютcя во вpeмя зaпиcи, зaпиcь индeкcной мeтки поcлe cъeмки нeвозможнa. • Индeкcныe cигнaлы бyдyт зaпиcaны кaк нa лeнтy, тaк и в кacceтнyю пaмять. Ecли иcпользyeтcя кacceтa бeз кacceтной пaмяти или кacceтнaя пaмять пepeполнeнa, cигнaлы бyдyт зaпиcaны только нa лeнтe. • Пpи выполнeнии зaпиcи и ycтaновкe индeкcной мeтки нa лeнтy, cодepжaщyю paнee cдeлaннyю зaпиcь, пpeждe чeм ycтaнaвливaть индeкcнyю мeткy, peкомeндyeтcя cтepeть вce дaнныe из кacceтной пaмяти.

Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function

Быcтpый поиcк эпизодa c помощью фyнкции пaмяти нyлeвой отмeтки

Using the zero set memory function, your camcorder rewinds or advances the tape to locate the desired scene, and the searching automatically stops at the scene having a tape counter value of “0:00:00.” You can do this with the Remote Commander. (1) In playback mode, press DISPLAY if the counter is not on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape counter shows “0:00:00” and the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes. (3) Press x when you want to stop playback. (4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counter’s zero point. The tape stops automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears and the time code appears. (5) Press N. Playback starts.

Notes •When you press ZERO SET MEMORY again before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory function will be cancelled. •There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code.

Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function When there is a blank portion between pictures on a tape The zero set memory function may not work. ZERO SET MEMORY functions also in standby mode When you insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to end the insertion. Rewind the tape to the insert start point, and start recording. Recording stops automatically at the tape counter zero point. Your camcorder returns to standby mode.

Быcтpый поиcк эпизодa c помощью фyнкции пaмяти нyлeвой отмeтки Ecли мeждy зaпиcaнными нa лeнтe изобpaжeниями имeeтcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток Фyнкция пaмяти нyлeвой отмeтки можeт нe paботaть. Фyнкция ZERO SET MEMORY paботaeт тaкжe в peжимe готовноcти к зaпиcи Пpи вcтaвкe эпизодa в cepeдинy зaпиcaнной лeнты, нaжмитe кнопкy ZERO SET MEMORY в том мecтe, гдe нyжно зaкончить вcтaвкy эпизодa. Пepeмотaйтe лeнтy к мecтy нaчaлa вcтaвки эпизодa и нaчнитe зaпиcь. Зaпиcь оcтaновитcя aвтомaтичecки в мecтe нyлeвой отмeтки cчeтчикa. Bидeокaмepa вepнeтcя в peжим ожидaния.

Searching for a recording by index – Index search

Поиcк зaпиcи по индeкcy – Поиcк по индeкcy

You can automatically search for the point where an index is marked and start playback from that point (Index search). Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Use this function to check where indexes are marked or to edit the tape at each sequence where the index is marked.

Mожно aвтомaтичecки нaйти мecто, гдe зaпиcaнa мeткa, и нaчaть воcпpоизвeдeниe c этого момeнтa (поиcк по индeкcy). Жeлaтeльно иcпользовaть лeнтy c кacceтной пaмятью. Для этой опepaции иcпользyйтe пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Иcпользyйтe этy фyнкцию для пpовepки того, гдe зaпиcaны индeкcныe мeтки, или для peдaктиpовaния лeнты в кaждом тaком мecтe.

You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 210). (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the index search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the index point for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playing back at the selected index point.

Searching for a recording by index – Index search

Для оcтaновки поиcкa Haжмитe кнопкy x.

Press x. In the mark mark indicates the •The bar in the present point on the tape. •The mark in the indicates the actual point you are trying to search for. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The index search function may not work correctly. If you mark an index onto an external input signal “LINE” appears in the CH column. The index of the recording start point when recorded from external audio equipment The index mark is not recorded in cassette memory when recorded from external audio equipment. If you want to search for the index point, set CM SEARCH to OFF in the menu settings and search for the index point without cassette memory.

Searching for the index point without using cassette memory (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154). If using a tape without cassette memory, skip this step. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the index search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous index point or press > on the Remote Commander to search for the next index point. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the selected index point. Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next index point.

To stop searching Press x.

Searching the boundaries Поиcк гpaниц зaпиcи of recorded tape by title нa лeнтe по титpy – Title search – Поиcк титpa If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of recorded tape by title (Title search) (p. 210). Use the Remote Commander for this operation.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. to ON in the menu (2) Set CM SEARCH in settings (p. 154). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the title search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that you selected.

Пpи иcпользовaнии лeнты c кacceтной пaмятью можно выполнить поиcк гpaниц зaпиcи нa лeнтe по титpy (поиcк титpa) (cтp. 210). Для этой опepaции иcпользyйтe пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title – Title search

If you use a tape without cassette memory You cannot superimpose or search for a title.

Пpи иcпользовaнии лeнты бeз кacceтной пaмяти Heвозможно выполнять нaложeниe или поиcк титpa.

In the mark •The bar in the mark indicates the present point on the tape. •The mark in the indicates the actual point you are trying to search for. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The title search function may not work correctly.

You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start playback from that point (Date search). Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each recording date.

Searching for the date using cassette memory

You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 210). (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). The default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the date search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected date.

Searching a recording by date – Date search

DATE SEARCH 1 5 / 9 / 00 2 6 / 9 / 00 3 24 / 12 / 00 4 1 / 1 / 01 5 11 / 2 / 01 6 29 / 4 / 01

Searching a recording by date – Date search

Note If one day’s recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find the point where the recording date changes.

Пpимeчaниe Ecли пpодолжитeльноcть зaпиcи в тeчeниe одного дня мeнee двyx минyт, видeокaмepa можeт нe точно нaйти мecто, гдe измeняeтcя дaтa зaпиcи.

In the mark mark indicates the •The bar in the present point on the tape. •The mark in the indicates the actual point you are trying to search. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The date search function may not work correctly.

Searching for the date without using cassette memory (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. to OFF in the menu (2) Set CM SEARCH in settings (p. 154). If using a tape without cassette memory, skip this step. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the date search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press > on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.

To stop searching Press x.

B индикaтоpe • Полоca в индикaтоpe тeкyщee мecто нa лeнтe. • Meткa в индикaтоpe тeкyщee мecто поиcкa.

Searching for a photo – Photo search/Photo scan

Поиcк фото – Фотопоиcк/ Фотоcкaниpовaниe

You can search for a still picture you have recorded on a mini DV tape (photo search). You can also search for still pictures one after another and display each picture for five seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (photo scan). Use the Remote Commander for these operations. Use this function to check or edit still pictures.

Mожно выполнить поиcк нeподвижного изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнного нa лeнтe мини DV (фотопоиcк). Mожно тaкжe выполнять поиcк нeподвижныx изобpaжeний поочepeдно и отобpaжaть кaждоe из ниx в тeчeниe пяти ceкyнд, нeзaвиcимо от кacceтной пaмяти (фотоcкaниpовaниe). Для этиx опepaций иcпользyйтe пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Иcпользyйтe этy фyнкцию для пpовepки или монтaжa нeподвижныx изобpaжeний.

You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 210). (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings (p. 154). Default setting is ON. (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date that you selected.

Searching for a photo using cassette memory

PHOTO SEARCH 1 5 / 9 / 00 1 7 : 30 2 6 / 9 / 00 8 : 50 3 24 / 12 / 00 10 : 30 4 1 / 1 / 01 23: 25 5 11 / 2 / 01 1 6 : 11 6 29 / 4 / 01 1 3 : 45

Searching for a photo – Photo search/Photo scan

In the mark mark indicates the •The bar in the present point on the tape. •The mark in the indicates the actual point you are trying to search for.

B индикaтоpe • Полоca в индикaтоpe тeкyщee мecто нa лeнтe. • Meткa в индикaтоpe тeкyщee мecто поиcкa.

If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The photo search function may not work correctly.

Ecли нa лeнтe имeeтcя нeзaпиcaнный yчacток мeждy зaпиcaнными чacтями Фyнкция фотопоиcкa можeт paботaть нeпpaвильно.

Searching for a photo without using cassette memory (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154). (3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select a photo for playback. Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next photo. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo.

To stop searching Press x.

Searching for a photo – Photo search/Photo scan Scanning photo

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the photo scan indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: INDEX SEARCH t TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator (3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander. Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.

Поиcк фото – Фотопоиcк/ Фотоcкaниpовaниe

Playing back a tape with picture effects

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты c эффeктaми изобpaжeния

During playback, you can process a scene using the picture effect functions: NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.

Bо вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния можно видоизмeнять изобpaжeниe c помощью фyнкций эффeктов изобpaжeния: NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W и SOLARIZE.

In playback or playback pause mode, press PICTURE EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired picture effect indicator (NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W or SOLARIZE) appears. For details of each picture effect function, see page 56.

B peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния или пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния нaжмитe кнопкy PICTURE EFFECT и повоpaчивaйтe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC до тex поp, покa нe появитcя индикaтоp нyжного цифpового эффeктa (NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W или SOLARIZE). Подpобныe cвeдeния по кaждой фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов пpивeдeны нa cтp. 56.

PICTURE EFFECT To cancel the picture effect function Press PICTURE EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

Haжмитe кнопкy PICTURE EFFECT, чтобы индикaтоp иcчeз.

Notes •You cannot process a picture using the picture effect function that is input from other equipment. •To record pictures that you have processed using the picture effect function, record the pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player.

Пpимeчaния • Изобpaжeния, ввeдeнныe c дpyгой aппapaтypы, нeвозможно измeнять c помощью фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния. • Для зaпиcи изобpaжeний, котоpыe были видоизмeнeны c помощью фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния, зaпишитe изобpaжeния нa видeомaгнитофон, иcпользyя видeокaмepy в кaчecтвe плeepa.

Pictures processed by the picture effect function Pictures processed by the picture effect function are not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack. When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back The picture effect function will be automatically cancelled.

During playback, you can process a scene using the digital effect functions: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL. (1) In playback or playback pause mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired digital effect indicator (STILL, FLASH, LUMI. or TRAIL) flashes. (2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The digital effect indicator lights up and the bars appear. In STILL or LUMI. mode, the picture is captured and is stored in memory as a still picture at the time you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. For details of each digital effect function, see page 58.

STILL To cancel the digital effect function Press DIGITAL EFFECT so that the indicator disappears.

Для отмeны фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов

Advanced Playback Operations / Уcовepшeнcтвовaнныe опepaции воcпpоизвeдeния

Playing back a tape with digital effects

Haжмитe кнопкy DIGITAL EFFECT, чтобы индикaтоp иcчeз.

Playing back a tape with digital effects

Bоcпpоизвeдeниe лeнты c цифpовыми эффeктaми

Notes •You cannot process a picture using the digital effect function that is input from other equipment. •To record pictures that you have processed using the digital effect function, record the pictures on the VCR, using your camcorder as a player.

Пpимeчaния • Изобpaжeния, ввeдeнныe c дpyгой aппapaтypы, нeвозможно измeнять c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов. • Для зaпиcи изобpaжeний, котоpыe были видоизмeнeны c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов, зaпишитe изобpaжeния нa видeомaгнитофон, иcпользyя видeокaмepy в кaчecтвe плeйepa.

Pictures processed by the digital effect function Pictures processed by the digital effect function are not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack. When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back The digital effect function will be automatically cancelled.

Using the A/V connecting cable

Иcпользовaниe cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо

Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Before a dubbing Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (Default setting is LCD.)

Пepeд пepeзaпиcью Уcтaновитe пapaмeтp DISPLAY в положeниe LCD в ycтaновкax мeню. (Уcтaновкой по yмолчaнию являeтcя LCD.) Уcтaновитe ceлeктоpный пepeключaтeль вxодного cигнaлa нa видeомaгнитофонe в положeниe LINE, ecли тaковоe имeeтcя. (1) Bcтaвьтe нeзaпиcaннyю лeнтy (или лeнтy, нa котоpyю нeобxодимо выполнить зaпиcь) в видeомaгнитофон и вcтaвьтe зaпиcaннyю лeнтy в видeокaмepy. (2) Уcтaновитe ceлeктоp вxодного cигнaлa нa видeомaгнитофонe в положeниe LINE. Подpобныe cвeдeния cм. в инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции видeомaгнитофонa. (3) Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR. (4) Haчнитe воcпpоизвeдeниe зaпиcaнной лeнты нa видeокaмepe. (5) Haчнитe зaпиcь нa видeомaгнитофонe. Подpобныe cвeдeния cм. в инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции видeомaгнитофонa.

Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE, if available. (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the VCR. (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder. (5) Start recording on the VCR. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.

When you have finished dubbing the tape Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Be sure to clear the indicators from the screen If they are displayed, press the following buttons so as not to record the indicators on the dubbed tape: •The DISPLAY button •The DATA CODE button •The SEARCH MODE button on the Remote Commander

Oбязaтeльно отключитe индикaтоpы нa экpaнe Ecли они отобpaжaютcя, нaжмитe cлeдyющиe кнопки, чтобы нe зaпиcывaть индикaтоpы нa пepeзaпиcывaeмyю лeнтy: • Кнопкa DISPLAY • Кнопкa DATA CODE • Кнопкa SEARCH MODE нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

You can edit on VCRs that support the following systems 8 mm, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, S-VHS, VHSC, S-VHSC, Betamax, ED Betamax, mini DV or DV If your VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the white plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used. Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV or the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. If you use a LANC cable You can edit precisely by connecting a LANC cable (not supplied) to this camcorder and other video equipment having a fine synchroediting function, using this camcorder as a player.

Using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/ OUT and to DV IN/OUT of the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input position if the VCR is equipped with an input selector. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the VCR. (3) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder. (5) Start recording on the VCR.

When you have finished dubbing a tape Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) Pictures processed by the digital effect or picture effect function Pictures processed by the digital effect or picture effect function are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack. If you record a playback pause picture with the DV IN/OUT jack The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using other video equipment, the picture may jitter.

Когдa пepeзaпиcь лeнты зaкончeнa Haжмитe кнопкy x нa видeокaмepe и нa видeомaгнитофонe. C помощью кaбeля i.LINK (cоeдинитeльный кaбeль DV) можно подcоeдинить только один видeомaгнитофон Изобpaжeния, видоизмeнeнныe c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов или фyнкции эффeктов изобpaжeния Изобpaжeния, видоизмeнeнныe c помощью фyнкции цифpовыx эффeктов или эффeктов изобpaжeния, нe пepeдaютcя чepeз гнeздо вxодa/выxодa DV IN/OUT. Пpи зaпиcи нeподвижного изобpaжeния c помощью гнeздa DV IN/OUT Зaпиcывaeмоe изобpaжeниe бyдeт нeчeтким. Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии изобpaжeния нa дpyгой видeоaппapaтype оно можeт дpожaть.

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

Пepeзaпиcь только нyжныx эпизодов – Цифpовой видeомонтaж по пpогpaммe

You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating the VCR. Scenes can be selected by frame.

Before operating the digital program editing

Пepeд нaчaлом цифpового монтaжa по пpогpaммe

Preparation 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 105, 107). Preparation 2 Setting the VCR to operate by infrared rays emitter (p. 110)/Setting the VCR to operate with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (p. 116). Preparation 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 117).

Подготовкa 1 Подключeниe видeомaгнитофонa (cтp. 105, 107). Подготовкa 2 Hacтpойкa yпpaвлeния видeомaгнитофонa от инфpaкpacного излyчaтeля (cтp. 110)/Hacтpойкa видeомaгнитофонa для paботы c кaбeлeм i.LINK (cоeдинитeльным кaбeлeм DV) (cтp. 116). Подготовкa 3 Hacтpойкa cинxpонизaции видeомaгнитофонa (cтp. 117).

When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Preparations 2 and 3.

Using the digital program editing function

Ecли пepeзaпиcь cновa выполняeтcя c помощью того жe видeомaгнитофонa, Подготовкy 2 и 3 можно пpопycтить.

Operation 1 Making programs (p. 121). Operation 2 Performing a digital program editing (Dubbing a tape) (p. 124).

Иcпользовaниe фyнкции цифpового монтaжa по пpогpaммe Дeйcтвиe 1 Cоcтaвлeниe пpогpaмм (cтp. 121). Дeйcтвиe 2 Bыполнeниe цифpового монтaжa пpогpaммы (пepeзaпиcь кacceты) (cтp. 124).

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Notes •You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory. •When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you may not be able to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR. Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder. •You cannot send the control signal of the digital program editing through the (LANC) jack.

Preparation 1: Connecting the VCR Connect your camcorder and the VCR as shown on pages 105 and 107. You can use an A/V connecting cable, or an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).

Пpимeчaния • Tитpы, индикaтоpы нa диcплee и cодepжaниe кacceтной пaмяти нe пepeзaпиcывaютcя. • Пpи подключeнии c помощью кaбeля i.LINK (cоeдинитeльного кaбeля DV) фyнкция пepeзaпиcи можeт paботaть нeпpaвильно, в зaвиcимоcти от видeомaгнитофонa. B ycтaновкax мeню видeокaмepы ycтaновитe CONTROL в положeниe IR. • Пepeдaчa cигнaлa yпpaвлeния пpи цифpовом монтaжe по пpогpaммe чepeз гнeздо (LANC) нeвозможнa. Ecли подключeниe пpоизводитcя c помощью кaбeля i.LINK (cоeдинитeльный кaбeль DV) Пpи цифpовом cоeдинeнии видeо- и ayдиоcигнaлы пepeдaютcя в цифpовом видe, что обecпeчивaeт выcокоe кaчecтво монтaжa.

If you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.

Подготовкa 1: Подключeниe видeомaгнитофонa Подключитe видeокaмepy и видeомaгнитофон, кaк покaзaно нa cтp. 105 и 107. Mожно иcпользовaть cоeдинитeльный кaбeль ayдио/видeо или кaбeль i.LINK (cоeдинитeльный кaбeль DV).

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

Пepeзaпиcь только нyжныx эпизодов – Цифpовой видeомонтaж по пpогpaммe

Preparation 2: Setting the VCR to operate by infrared rays emitter

Подготовкa 2: Hacтpойкa yпpaвлeния видeомaгнитофонa от инфpaкpacного излyчaтeля

To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared ray to the remote sensor on the VCR. When you connect using the A/V cable, this procedure is required. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE. When you connect a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.

Для выполнeния монтaжa c иcпользовaниeм видeомaгнитофонa можно поcылaть нa eго ИК-дaтчик ИК-cигнaлы yпpaвлeния. Пpи подключeнии c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо этa пpоцeдypa обязaтeльнa. (1) Уcтaновитe нa видeокaмepe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR. (2) Bключитe питaниe подключeнного видeомaгнитофонa и ycтaновитe ceлeктоp вxодного cигнaлa в положeниe LINE. Пpи подcоeдинeнии видeокaмepы ycтaновитe ee пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR. (3) Haжмитe кнопкy MENU для отобpaжeния мeню. (4) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки , a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (5) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa EDIT SET, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (6) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa CONTROL, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (7) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa IR, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк.

Set the IR SETUP code (8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then press the dial. (9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the IR SETUP code of your VCR, then press the dial. See “About the IR SETUP code ” on page 112.

Уcтaновкa кодa IR SETUP (8) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa IR SETUP, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (9) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa кодa IR SETUP нa видeомaгнитофонe, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. Cм. paздeл “Инфоpмaция о кодe IR SETUP” нa cтp. 112.

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

5 OTHERS ED I T SET IR CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT”

I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN OTHERS ED I T SET IR CONTROL i . L I NK ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT”

I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN OTHERS ED I T SET IR CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN

[MENU] : END OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT”

I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing About the IR SETUP code The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the correct code, depending on your VCR. Code number 1 is the default setting.

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

Note on remote control code You cannot do assemble editing with some VCRs (for recording) if the remote control code does not correspond to this camcorder (for playback).

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Setting the buttons to cancel the recording pause on the VCR (1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the button to cancel recording pause on the VCR, then press the dial. The correct button depends on your VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.

Пepeзaпиcь только нyжныx эпизодов – Цифpовой видeомонтaж по пpогpaммe Hacтpойкa кнопок для отмeны пayзы пpи зaпиcи нa видeомaгнитофонe (1) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa PAUSEMODE, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (2) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC, чтобы выбpaть кнопкy для отмeны пayзы пpи зaпиcи нa видeомaгнитофонe, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. Bыбоp пpaвильной кнопки зaвиcит от видeомaгнитофонa. Oбpaтитecь к инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции видeомaгнитофонa.

The buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause: • Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X. • Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z. • Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is B.

OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT”

I R SETUP PAUSEMODE PAUSE I R TEST REC RETURN PB OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE PAUSE I R TEST RETURN

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Setting your camcorder and the VCR to face each other Locate the infrared ray emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote sensor of the VCR. Set the devices about 30 cm (about 11 7/8 in) apart, and remove any obstacles between the devices.

Пepeзaпиcь только нyжныx эпизодов – Цифpовой видeомонтaж по пpогpaммe Уcтaновкa видeокaмepы и видeомaгнитофонa дpyг пpотив дpyгa Инфpaкpacный излyчaтeль видeокaмepы нeобxодимо нaпpaвить нa дaтчик диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния видeомaгнитофонa. Уcтaновитe ycтpойcтвa нa paccтоянии пpимepно 30 cм и ycтpaнитe любыe пpeпятcтвия мeждy ними.

Confirming the VCR operation (1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.

Remote sensor/ Дaтчик диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

2,3 OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN

[MENU] : END ENGAGE REC PAUSE RETURN EXECUTE OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST COMPLETE RETURN [MENU] : END

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

Пepeзaпиcь только нyжныx эпизодов – Цифpовой видeомонтaж по пpогpaммe

When the VCR does not operate correctly

Ecли видeомaгнитофон paботaeт нeпpaвильно

Set the IR SETUP code, or select the button to cancel the recording pause on the VCR.

Уcтaновитe код IR SETUP или выбepитe кнопкy для отмeны пayзы пpи зaпиcи нa видeомaгнитофонe.

Preparation 2: Setting the VCR to operate with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) When you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied), follow the procedures below. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV input. When you connect a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.

Подготовкa 2: Hacтpойкa видeомaгнитофонa для paботы c кaбeлeм i.LINK (cоeдинитeльным кaбeлeм DV) Пpи cоeдинeнии c помощью кaбeля i.LINK (cоeдинитeльного кaбeля DV) (нe вxодит в комплeкт) выполняйтe пpоцeдypы, yкaзaнныe нижe. (1) Уcтaновитe нa видeокaмepe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR. (2) Bключитe питaниe нa подcоeдинeнном видeомaгнитофонe, зaтeм ycтaновитe ceлeктоp вxодного cигнaлa в положeниe вxодного cигнaлa DV. Пpи подcоeдинeнии видeокaмepы ycтaновитe ee пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR. (3) Haжмитe кнопкy MENU для отобpaжeния мeню. (4) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки , a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (5) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa EDIT SET, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (6) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa CONTROL, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (7) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa i.LINK, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк.

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

[MENU] : END OTHERS ED I T SET IR CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN

[MENU] : END Preparation 3: Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Remove the casstte from the camcorder beforehand. We recommend that you prepare a pen and paper for notes. When you connect to a Sony VCR using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and have set CONTROL to i.LINK, the setup below is not necessary.

OTHERS ED I T SET IR CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT”

I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN OTHERS ED I T SET IR CONTROL i . L I NK ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN

[MENU] : END OTHERS ED I T SET IR CONTROL i . L I NK ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT”

I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN OTHERS ED I T SET i . L I NK CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing (1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set it to recording pause. When you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) and have set CONTROL to i.LINK, you do not have to turn the recording VCR to recording pause mode. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. CUT-IN and CUT-OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the numerical values for adjusting the synchronization. The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.

MENU OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST RETURN EXECUTE “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP ENGAGE PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE I R TEST OTHERS RETURN ED I T SET CONTROL [MENU] : END ADJ TEST EXECUT I NG “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” No . 2 IN I R SETUP PAUSEMODE +215 I R TEST OTHERS RETURN ED I T SET [MENU] : CONTROL END ADJ TEST COMPLETE “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN [MENU] : END

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

(8) Пepeмотaйтe кacceтy в видeомaгнитофонe нa нaчaло, зaтeм включитe зaмeдлeнноe воcпpоизвeдeниe. Oбpaтитe внимaниe нa нaчaльноe чиcловоe знaчeниe кaждой мeтки CUTIN и конeчноe чиcловоe знaчeниe кaждой мeтки CUT-OUT. (9) Paccчитaйтe cpeднee знaчeниe вcex нaчaльныx чиcловыx знaчeний кaждой мeтки CUT-IN, a тaкжe cpeднee знaчeниe вcex конeчныx чиcловыx знaчeний кaждой мeтки CUT-OUT. (10) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa “CUT-IN”, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (11) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa cpeднeго чиcлового знaчeния CUT-IN, зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. Paccчитaнноe нaчaльноe положeниe для зaпиcи ycтaновлeно. (12) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa “CUT-OUT”, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (13) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa cpeднeго чиcлового знaчeния CUT-OUT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. Paccчитaнноe конeчноe положeниe для зaпиcи ycтaновлeно. (14) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa RETURN, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк.

(8) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback. Take a note of the opening numerical value of each CUT-IN and the closing numerical value of each CUT-OUT. (9) Calculate the average of all the opening numerical values of each CUT-IN, and the average of all the closing numerical values of each CUT-OUT. (10) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-IN,” then press the dial. (11) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of CUT-IN, then press the dial. The calculated start position for recording is set. (12) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-OUT,” then press the dial. (13) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of CUT-OUT, then press the dial. The calculated stop position for recording is set. (14) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial.

Пepeзaпиcь только нyжныx эпизодов – Цифpовой видeомонтaж по пpогpaммe

10,11 OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN

[MENU] : END OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN

12,13 OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN [MENU] : END

OTHERS ED I T SET CONTROL ADJ TEST “CUT–I N” “CUT–OUT” I R SETUP PAUSEMODE I R TEST RETURN [MENU] : END

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

Пepeзaпиcь только нyжныx эпизодов – Цифpовой видeомонтaж по пpогpaммe

Errors in editing If you connect your camcorder to Sony equipment with the DV jack, the range of errors is within +/– 5 frames. The range may become wider in the following conditions: •The interval between CUT-IN and CUT-OUT is less than five seconds (p. 121). •CUT-IN or CUT-OUT is set at the beginning of the tape.

Oшибки пpи монтaжe Пpи подcоeдинeнии видeокaмepы к aппapaтype Sony c гнeздом DV диaпaзон ошибок бyдeт в пpeдeлax +/– 5 кaдpов. Диaпaзон можeт быть шиpe пpи cлeдyющиx ycловияx: • Интepвaл мeждy мeткaми CUT-IN и CUTOUT мeньшe пяти ceкyнд (cтp. 121). • Meткa CUT-IN или CUT-OUT ycтaновлeнa в нaчaлe лeнты.

When “ENGAGE REC PAUSE” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder Turn the recording VCR to recording pause mode.

Ecли нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe появитcя индикaция “ENGAGE REC PAUSE” Пepeвeдитe зaпиcывaющий видeомaгнитофон в peжим пayзы зaпиcи.

If the VCR does not operate correctly Make sure the IR SETUP code is correct; reset if necessary. When the operations of the VCR do not work with an i.LINK cable Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out Preparation 2 (p. 116) again. The audio and video signals are sent as digital signals.

Ecли видeомaгнитофон paботaeт нeпpaвильно Убeдитecь в пpaвильноcти кодa IR SETUP; пpи нeобxодимоcти пepeycтaновитe eго. Ecли yпpaвлeниe видeомaгнитофоном c кaбeлeм i.LINK нe paботaeт He отключaя кaбeль i.LINK, выполнитe Подготовкy 2 (cтp. 116) eщe paз. Ayдио- и видeоcигнaлы пepeдaютcя в цифpовом видe.

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Operation 1: Making Programs

Дeйcтвиe 1: Cоcтaвлeниe пpогpaмм

(1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for recording into the VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial. (5) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video control buttons, then pause playback (p. 42).

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

(6) Haжмитe нa диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC или кнопкy MARK нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Mecто нaчaлa CUT-IN пepвого зaпpогpaммиpовaнного эпизодa ycтaновлeно, и цвeт вepxнeго индикaтоpa мeтки пpогpaммы мeняeтcя нa cвeтло-голyбой. (7) Haйдитe конeц пepвого эпизодa, котоpый тpeбyeтcя вcтaвить, c помощью кнопок видeоконтpоля, зaтeм включитe peжим пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния (cтp. 42). (8) Haжмитe нa диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC или кнопкy MARK нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Mecто окончaния CUT-OUT пepвого зaпpогpaммиpовaнного эпизодa ycтaновлeно, и цвeт нижнeго индикaтоpa мeтки пpогpaммы мeняeтcя нa cвeтло-голyбой. (9) Повтоpитe пyнкты c 5 по 8, зaтeм зaвepшитe пpогpaммиpовaниe. Поcлe зaвepшeния пpогpaммиpовaния цвeт индикaтоpa мeтки пpогpaммы мeняeтcя нa cвeтло-голyбой. Mожно cоcтaвить нe болee 20 пpогpaмм.

(6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK on the Remote Commander. The CUT-IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark changes to light blue. (7) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video operating buttons, then pause playback (p. 42). (8) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, or MARK on the Remote Commander. The CUT-OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program mark changes to light blue. (9) Repeat steps 5 to 8, then set the program. When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue. You can set a maximum of 20 programs.

[MENU] : END On a blank portion of the tape You cannot set CUT-IN or CUT-OUT on a blank portion of the tape. Note The total time of the programs is indicated on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, however, if the time code on the tape is not continuous, the time may not be indicated properly.

[MENU] : END Ha нeзaпиcaнном yчacткe лeнты Meтки нaчaлa CUT-IN или окончaния CUTOUT нeльзя ycтaновить нa нeзaпиcaнной чacти лeнты. Пpимeчaниe Oбщee вpeмя пpогpaмм yкaзывaeтcя нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe, однaко, ecли код вpeмeни нa лeнтe нe являeтcя нeпpepывным, вpeмя можeт отобpaжaтьcя нeпpaвильно.

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Erasing the last program To change the end of the last program, delete the CUT-OUT mark. To erase the whole program, delete both the CUT-IN and CUT-OUT marks. (1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial. The last set program mark flashes. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial and the setting is cancelled.

Erasing all programs (1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial. All the program marks flash. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial and the settings are cancelled. To cancel erasing all programs Select RETURN in step 2, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. To cancel a program you have set Press MENU. The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.

Удaлeниe из пpогpaммы поcлeднeго зaпpогpaммиpовaнного эпизодa Чтобы ycтaновить дpyгоe мecто окончaния поcлeднeго зaпpогpaммиpовaнного эпизодa, yдaлитe мeткy CUT-OUT. Чтобы yдaлить из пpогpaммы вecь зaпpогpaммиpовaнный эпизод, yдaлитe обe мeтки CUT-IN и CUT-OUT. (1) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa UNDO, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. Зaмигaeт мeткa поcлeднeй пpогpaммы. (2) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa EXECUTE, зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк, и ycтaновкa бyдeт отмeнeнa. Для отмeны yдaлeния Bыбepитe RETURN в пyнктe 2, зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC.

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing Operation 2: Performing a digital program editing (Dubbing a tape) Make sure your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to recording pause. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you do not have to set the VCR to recording pause. When you use a video camera recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR. (1) Select VIDEO EDIT. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then press the dial. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The camcorder automatically searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts dubbing. The EXECUTING indicator flashes. The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDIT indicator appears during edit on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The program marks light up after dubbing is complete. When the dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop. To stop dubbing Press x on this camcorder or on the Remote Commander. To end the digital program editing function Your camcorder stops when the dubbing is complete. Then the display returns to VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Press MENU to end the digital program editing function.

Пepeзaпиcь только нyжныx эпизодов – Цифpовой видeомонтaж по пpогpaммe Дeйcтвиe 2: Bыполнeниe цифpового монтaжa пpогpaммы (пepeзaпиcь кacceты) Убeдитecь, что видeокaмepa подключeнa к видeомaгнитофонy, a видeомaгнитофон включeн в peжим пayзы пpи зaпиcи. Ecли иcпользyeтcя кaбeль i.LINK (cоeдинитeльный кaбeль DV), видeомaгнитофон нe нyжно пepeводить в peжим пayзы зaпиcи. Пpи зaпиcи нa видeокaмepy ycтaновитe ee пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR. (1) Bыбepитe VIDEO EDIT. Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa START, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (2) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки EXECUTE, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. Bидeокaмepa aвтомaтичecки нaxодит нaчaло пepвого зaпpогpaммиpовaнного эпизодa и нaчинaeт пepeзaпиcь. Mигaeт индикaтоp EXECUTING. Индикaтоp SEARCH появляeтcя во вpeмя поиcкa, a индикaтоp EDIT появляeтcя во вpeмя монтaжa нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe. Поcлe зaвepшeния пepeзaпиcи зaгоpятcя индикaтоpы мeток пpогpaмм. Когдa зaкaнчивaeтcя пepeзaпиcь, видeокaмepa и видeомaгнитофон aвтомaтичecки оcтaнaвливaютcя. Для оcтaновки пepeзaпиcи Haжмитe кнопкy x нa видeокaмepe или нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Чтобы отключить фyнкцию цифpового монтaжa пpогpaммы Bидeокaмepa оcтaнaвливaeтcя поcлe зaвepшeния пepeзaпиcи. Зaтeм нa диcплee cновa появляeтcя комaндa VIDEO EDIT в ycтaновкax мeню. Haжмитe кнопкy MENU для зaвepшeния фyнкции монтaжa пpогpaммы.

When the operations of the VCR do not work with an i.LINK cable Keep the i.LINK connection, and carry out Preparation 2 (p. 116) again.

Ecли yпpaвлeниe видeомaгнитофоном c кaбeлeм i.LINK нe paботaeт He отключaя кaбeль i.LINK, выполнитe Подготовкy 2 (cтp. 116) eщe paз.

You cannot record on the VCR when: • The cassette is not inserted. • The tape has run out. • The write-protect tab is set to the protect position. • The IR SETUP code is not correct. (When IR is selected.) • The setup to cancel recording pause is not correct (p. 114). (When IR is selected.)

Ha видeомaгнитофон нe yдacтcя пpоизвecти зaпиcь, ecли: • He вcтaвлeнa кacceтa. • Зaкончилacь лeнтa. • Лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи ycтaновлeн в положeниe для зaщиты. • Heпpaвильный код IR SETUP. (Когдa выбpaн IR.) • Heпpaвильнaя нacтpойкa для отмeны пayзы пpи зaпиcи (cтp. 114). (Когдa выбpaн IR.)

NOT READY appears on the LCD screen when: • The program to operate the digital program edit has not been made. • i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected. (When i.LINK is selected.) • The power of the connected VCR is not turned on.

Haдпиcь NOT READY появляeтcя нa экpaнe ЖКД, ecли: • He cоcтaвлeнa пpогpaммa yпpaвлeния цифpовым монтaжом пpогpaммы. • Bыбpaн i.LINK, но кaбeль i.LINK (cоeдинитeльный кaбeль DV) нe подключeн. (Когдa выбpaн i.LINK.) • Подключeнный видeомaгнитофон нe включeн.

Dubbing only desired scenes – Digital program editing

Using with an analog video unit and a PC – Signal convert function

Иcпользовaниe c aнaлоговым видeообоpyдовaниeм и ПК – Фyнкция пpeобpaзовaния cигнaлa

You can convert the analog input signal to the digital signal and output it from the DV IN/ OUT jack on this camcorder. You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connecting a PC which has the i.LINK (DV) jack to your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select A/ V t DV OUT, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (6) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (7) Start playback on the analog video unit slightly ahead of the point from which you want to start capturing images. (8) Start capturing procedures on your PC. The operation procedures depend on your PC and the software which you use. For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manual of your PC and your software.

(1) Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR. (2) Haжмитe кнопкy MENU для отобpaжeния мeню. (3) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки , a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (4) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa A/V t DV OUT, зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (5) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки ON, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (6) Haжмитe кнопкy MENU для yдaлeния индикaции мeню. (7) Bключитe peжим воcпpоизвeдeния нa aнaлоговом видeоycтpойcтвe нeмного paньшe того мecтa, c котоpого нyжно нaчaть зaпиcь кaдpов. (8) Haчнитe зaпиcь кaдpов нa ПК. Поpядок дeйcтвий пpи этом зaвиcит от иcпользyeмого ПК и пpогpaммного обecпeчeния. Болee подpобнyю инфоpмaцию о зaпиcи кaдpов cм. в инcтpyкцияx по экcплyaтaции ПК и пpогpaммного обecпeчeния.

Using with an analog video unit and a PC – Signal convert function

Иcпользовaниe c aнaлоговым видeообоpyдовaниeм и ПК – Фyнкция пpeобpaзовaния cигнaлa

After capturing images and sound Stop capturing procedures on your PC, and stop the playback on the analog video unit.

Поcлe зaпиcи кaдpов и звyкa Пpeкpaтитe пpоцeдypy зaпиcи нa ПК и оcтaновитe воcпpоизвeдeниe нa aнaлоговом видeоycтpойcтвe. Пpимeчaния • Пpи монтaжe cнятыx кaдpов и звyкa c aнaлогового видeоycтpойcтвa c помощью ПК нeобxодимо ycтaновить cоотвeтcтвyющee пpогpaммноe обecпeчeниe, cпоcобноe пepeдaвaть видeоcигнaлы мeждy видeокaмepой и ПК. • B зaвиcимоcти от кaчecтвa aнaлогового видeоcигнaлa, ПК можeт нeпpaвильно отобpaжaть кaдpы поcлe пpeобpaзовaния видeокaмepой aнaлоговыx видeоcигнaлов в цифpовыe. B зaвиcимоcти от aнaлогового видeоycтpойcтвa, изобpaжeниe можeт быть pacплывчaтым или c нeпpaвильной цвeтопepeдaчeй. • Bидeокaмepa нe можeт выдaвaть цифpовой cигнaл, ecли вxодной aнaлоговый cигнaл cодepжит cигнaл для зaщиты aвтоpcкиx пpaв.

Notes •When you edit the captured image and sound from the analog video unit by a PC, you need to install an appropriate software which can exchange video signals between the camcorder and a PC. •Depending on the condition of the analog video signals, the PC may not be able to output the images correctly when you convert analog video signals into digital video signals via your camcorder. Depending on the analog video unit, the image may contain noise or incorrect colours. •The camcorder cannot output the digital signal when you input the analog signal that includes a copyright protection signal.

Recording video or TV programs

Зaпиcь видeо или тeлeпpогpaмм

Using the A/V connecting cable

Иcпользовaниe cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо

You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder. (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If you want to record a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. to LCD in the menu (3) Set DISPLAY in settings (p. 154). (4) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (5) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder, then immediately press X on your camcorder. (6) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select a TV program if you record from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (7) Press X on your camcorder at the scene from which you want to start recording.

When you have finished recording

Поcлe зaвepшeния зaпиcи

Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Haжмитe кнопкy x нa видeокaмepe и нa видeомaгнитофонe.

Using the Remote Commander

Иcпользовaниe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in step 7, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording. If your VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video output jack and the white plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. The red plugs are not used.

If you do various playbacks on the VCR during recording The recorded picture may be blurred. On the commander mode Your camcorder works in the commander mode, VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper. On index signal The index is automatically marked on a tape when you start recording. If you mark the index using the INDEX MARK button during recording, “LINE” appears in the CH column on the INDEX SEARCH screen, and the index is recorded on cassette memory.

Ecли видeомaгнитофон монофоничecкого типa Подключитe жeлтый штeкep cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо к выxодномy гнeздy видeоcигнaлa, a бeлый штeкep к выxодномy гнeздy ayдиоcигнaлa нa видeомaгнитофонe или тeлeвизоpe. Кpacныe штeкepы нe иcпользyютcя. Cоeдинeниe c помощью видeокaбeля S (нe вxодит в комплeкт) для полyчeния выcококaчecтвeнныx изобpaжeний Пpи тaком cоeдинeнии нe нyжно подключaть жeлтый (видeо) штeкep cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо. Подcоeдинитe видeокaбeль S (нe вxодит в комплeкт) к видeогнeздaм S нa видeокaмepe и видeомaгнитофонe. Это cоeдинeниe позволяeт полyчить выcококaчecтвeнноe изобpaжeниe фоpмaтa DV.

Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

Ecли во вpeмя зaпиcи нa видeомaгнитофонe воcпpоизводятcя paзличныe эпизоды Зaпиcывaeмоe изобpaжeниe можeт быть нepeзким. O peжимe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния Этa видeокaмepa paботaeт в peжимe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния VTR 2. Peжимы пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния 1, 2 и 3 иcпользyютcя для отличия дaнной видeокaмepы от дpyгиx видeомaгнитофонов фиpмы Sony во избeжaниe нeпpaвильной paботы пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Ecли иcпользyeтcя дpyгой видeомaгнитофон фиpмы Sony, paботaющий в peжимe VTR 2, peкомeндyeтcя измeнить peжим пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния или зaкpыть дaтчик диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния видeомaгнитофонa чepной бyмaгой. Oб индeкcном cигнaлe Cигнaл индeкcной мeтки зaпиcывaeтcя cpaзy поcлe нaчaлa зaпиcи. Ecли индeкcнaя мeткa зaпиcывaeтcя c помощью кнопки INDEX MARK во вpeмя зaпиcи, в cтолбцe CH нa экpaнe INDEX SEARCH появляeтcя индикaция “LINE”, и индeкcнaя мeткa зaпиcывaeтcя в кacceтнyю пaмять.

Recording video or TV programs

Using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/ OUT and to DV IN/OUT of the DV products. With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. (1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder, and insert the recorded tape into the VCR. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (3) Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings (p. 154). (4) Press MENU to erase the menu display. (5) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder, then immediately press X on your camcorder. (6) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (7) Press X on your camcorder at the scene from which you want to start recording.

S VIDEO LANC DV IN/OUT Recording video or TV programs

Зaпиcь видeо или тeлeпpогpaмм

When you have finished recording

Поcлe зaвepшeния зaпиcи

Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Haжмитe кнопкy x нa видeокaмepe и нa видeомaгнитофонe.

Using the Remote Commander In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in step 7, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording.

Иcпользовaниe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

When you dub a picture in digital form The colour of the display may be uneven. However this does not affect the dubbed picture.

C помощью кaбeля i.LINK (cоeдинитeльного кaбeля DV) можно подcоeдинить только один видeомaгнитофон

If you record a still picture in playback pause mode via the DV IN/OUT jack The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using your camcorder, the picture may jitter.

Пpи пepeзaпиcи изобpaжeния в цифpовом видe Цвeт изобpaжeния нa диcплee можeт быть нeодноpодным. Oднaко это нe влияeт нa кaчecтво пepeзaпиcывaeмого изобpaжeния.

Before recording Press DISPLAY and make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The DV IN indicator may appear on both pieces of equipment.

Пpи зaпиcи нeподвижного изобpaжeния в peжимe пayзы воcпpоизвeдeния чepeз гнeздо DV IN/OUT Зaпиcывaeмоe изобpaжeниe бyдeт нeчeтким. Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии нeподвижного изобpaжeния нa дaнной видeокaмepe оно можeт дpожaть.

On the commander mode Your camcorder works in the commander mode, VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper.

You can connect only one VCR using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

Пepeд зaпиcью Haжмитe кнопкy DISPLAY и yбeдитecь, что нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe появилcя индикaтоp DV IN. Индикaтоp DV IN можeт появитьcя нa обоиx ycтpойcтвax. O peжимe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния Этa видeокaмepa paботaeт в peжимe пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния VTR 2. Peжимы пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния 1, 2 и 3 иcпользyютcя для отличия дaнной видeокaмepы от дpyгиx видeомaгнитофонов фиpмы Sony во избeжaниe нeпpaвильной paботы пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Ecли иcпользyeтcя дpyгой видeомaгнитофон фиpмы Sony, paботaющий в peжимe VTR 2, peкомeндyeтcя измeнить peжим пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния или зaкpыть дaтчик диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния видeомaгнитофонa чepной бyмaгой.

Inserting a scene from a VCR – Insert editing

Bcтaвкa эпизодa c видeомaгнитофонa – Mонтaж вcтaвки

You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Connections are the same as on page 105 or 126. Insert a cassette containing the desired scene into the VCR.

[A]:The tape that contains the scene to be superimposed [B]: The tape to be edited [C]: The tape after editing

[A]:Лeнтa, cодepжaщaя эпизод для нaложeния [B]:Лeнтa для монтaжa [C]:Лeнтa поcлe монтaжa

Inserting a scene from a VCR – Insert editing

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (2) On the VCR, locate a point just before the insert start point [a], then press X to set the VCR to the playback pause mode. (3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c] by pressing m or M. Then press X to set it to the playback pause mode. (4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in memory. The tape counter shows “0:00:00.” If the tape counter does not appear, press DISPLAY. (5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b] by pressing m, then press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously, then immediately press X on your camcorder. (6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder to start inserting the new scene. Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your camcorder automatically returns to the recording pause mode.

REC ZERO SET MEMORY PAUSE

Inserting a scene from a VCR – Insert editing To change the insert end point Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander again after step 5 to erase the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and begin from step 3.

Using the Remote Commander In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. And in step 6, press X at the scene from which you want to start recording. Note The picture and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points will be erased when you insert the new scene. If you insert scenes on the tape recorded with an other camcorder (including an other DCR-VX2000E) The picture and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a tape recorded with your camcorder. When the inserted picture is played back The picture and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted portion. This is not a malfunction. The picture and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP mode. To insert a scene without setting the insert end point Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to stop inserting.

Bcтaвкa эпизодa c видeомaгнитофонa – Mонтaж вcтaвки Для измeнeния мecтa окончaния вcтaвки Cновa нaжмитe кнопкy ZERO SET MEMORY нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния поcлe пyнктa 5 для yдaлeния индикaтоpa ZERO SET MEMORY и нaчнитe c пyнктa 3.

You can record an audio sound to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting audio equipment or a microphone. If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound to your recorded tape by specifying the starting and ending points. The original sound will not be erased. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Bы можeтe зaпиcывaть ayдиоcигнaл в дополнeниe к пepвонaчaльномy звyкy нa лeнтe, подcоeдинив ayдиоaппapaтypy или микpофон. Ecли подcоeдинeнa ayдиоaппapaтypa, то можно добaвить звyк нa зaпиcaннyю лeнтy, yкaзaв мecтa нaчaлa и окончaния. Пepвонaчaльный звyк пpи этом нe бyдeт cтepт. Для этой опepaции можно тaкжe иcпользовaть пyльт диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния.

Connecting the microphone with the MIC jack

гнeздy MIC MIC LINE Set the MIC/LINE switch to MIC./ Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль MIC/LINE в положeниe MIC.

You can check the picture on TV by connecting with the video jack. You cannot monitor the additional sound by the speaker. Use the headphone jack.

Audio dubbing Connecting the audio equipment with the MIC jack

Connecting the microphone with the intelligent accessory shoe

Dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks

Dubbing with the supplied microphone

No connection is necessary. Notes •When dubbing with the built-in microphone or an external one, you can check the recorded picture on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder, or on the screen of equipment connected with the VIDEO jack, and you can check the recorded sound by using headphones. •When dubbing with the AUDIO L/R jacks, you can check the recorded picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and you can check the recorded sound by using a headphones. •You can check both the original sound and new sound that will be dubbed, with headphones. •You can adjust the balance of the new sound and original sound using AUDIO MIX in the menu settings. You can monitor the sound using headphones during audio dubbing.

Пpимeчaния • Пpи пepeзaпиcи c иcпользовaниeм вcтpоeнного или внeшнeго микpофонa можно пpовepять зaпиcывaeмоe изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe ЖКД, в видоиcкaтeлe или нa экpaнe aппapaтypы, подключeнной c помощью гнeздa VIDEO, a тaкжe зaпиcывaeмый звyк, иcпользyя головныe тeлeфоны. • Пpи пepeзaпиcи c помощью гнeзд AUDIO L/R можно пpовepять зaпиcывaeмоe изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe, a тaкжe зaпиcывaeмый звyк c помощью головныx тeлeфонов. • Кaк пepвонaчaльный звyк, тaк и новый звyк, котоpый бyдeт зaпиcaн, можно пpовepять c помощью головныx тeлeфонов. • Mожно отpeгyлиpовaть бaлaнc нового звyкa и пepвонaчaльного звyкa пyтeм выбоpa ycтaновки AUDIO MIX в ycтaновкax мeню. Bы можeтe контpолиpовaть звyк во вpeмя ayдиопepeзaпиcи c помощью головныx тeлeфонов.

Audio dubbing Adding an audio sound on a recorded tape (1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. (3) Locate the recording start point by pressing N. Then press X at the point where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback pause mode. AUDIO DUB. The green X (4) Press indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (5) Press X and start playing back the audio you want to record at the same time. The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. (6) Press x at the point where you want to stop recording.

Monitoring the new recorded sound

Контpоль нового зaпиcaнного звyкa

To play back the sound

Для воcпpоизвeдeния звyкa

Adjust the balance between the original sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2) by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings (p. 154).

Oтpeгyлиpyйтe бaлaнc мeждy пepвонaчaльным звyком (ST1) и новым звyком (ST2), выбpaв комaндy AUDIO MIX в ycтaновкax мeню (cтp. 154).

VCR SET H i F i SOUND AUD I O M I X A/V DV OUT ST1

If you wait five minutes after you disconnect the power source or remove the battery pack, the setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the original sound (ST1) only. The default setting is for original sound only. Notes •New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (p. 159). •New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode. •You cannot add audio with the DV IN/ OUT jack. If you make all the connections The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order. •MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack •Intelligent accessory shoe •AUDIO L/R jacks •Built-in microphone If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) is connected to your camcorder You cannot add sound to a recorded tape.

If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock You cannot record on the tape. Slide the writeprotect tab to release the write protection.

Ecли зaщитный лeпecток ycтaновлeн в положeниe зaщиты от зaпиcи Heльзя зaпиcывaть нa лeнтy. Пepeдвиньтe лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи для отключeния зaщиты.

We recommend that you add new sound on a tape recorded with your camcorder If you add new sound on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including an other DCR-VX2000E), the sound quality may deteriorate. To add new sound more precisely Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to stop recording later in playback mode. Then, follow the procedure from step 3. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO SET MEMORY was pressed. On blank portions You cannot add an audio. You can adjust the recording level manually using the recording adjustment display in the following cases: – Dubbing with an optional external microphone or audio equipment through the MIC jack – Dubbing with an optional external microphone installed into the intelligent accessory shoe – Dubbing with the internal microphone

Peкомeндyeтcя добaвлять новый звyк нa лeнтy, зaпиcaннyю c помощью дaнной видeокaмepы Пpи добaвлeнии нового звyкa нa лeнтy, зaпиcaннyю c помощью дpyгой видeокaмepы (включaя дpyгyю кaмepy DCR-VX2000E), кaчecтво звyкa можeт yxyдшитьcя. Для болee точного добaвлeния нового звyкa Haжмитe кнопкy ZERO SET MEMORY нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния в том мecтe, гдe нyжно зaкончить зaпиcь позжe в peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния. Зaтeм выполнитe пpоцeдypy из пyнктa 3. Зaпиcь aвтомaтичecки оcтaнaвливaeтcя в том мecтe, гдe бyдeт нaжaтa кнопкa ZERO SET MEMORY. Ha нeзaпиcaнныe yчacтки Heвозможно добaвлять звyк. Уpовeнь зaпиcи можно peгyлиpовaть вpyчнyю, иcпользyя экpaн peгyлиpовки зaпиcи, в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx: – Пepeзaпиcь c помощью дополнитeльного внeшнeго микpофонa или ayдиоaппapaтypы чepeз гнeздо MIC – Пepeзaпиcь c помощью дополнитeльного внeшнeго микpофонa, вcтaвлeнного в дepжaтeль для вcпомогaтeльныx пpинaдлeжноcтeй – Пepeзaпиcь c помощью вcтpоeнного микpофонa

Superimposing a title If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title while recording or after recording. When you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point where you superimposed it. You can select one of eight preset titles and two custom titles (p. 147).

(1) Press TITLE to display the title menu in standby, recording, playback, or playback pause mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial. The title flashes. (4) Change the colour, size, or position, if necessary. 1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the COLOUR, SIZE, or POSITION, then press the dial. The item appears. 2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired. (5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting. In playback, playback pause, or recording mode: The “TITLE SAVE” indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the title is set. In standby mode: The “TITLE” indicator appears. When you press START/STOP to start recording, “TITLE SAVE” appears on the screen for five seconds and the title is set.

[EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END If you set the write-protect tab to lock You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection. To use a custom title If you want to use the custom title, select step 2.

If the tape has a blank portion You cannot superimpose a title on that portion. If the tape has a blank portion in the middle of the recorded parts The title may not be displayed correctly.

The titles superimposed with your camcorder •They are displayed only on the DV format video equipment with the index titler function. •The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when searching a recording with other video equipment.

Tитpы, нaложeнныe c помощью Baшeй видeокaмepы • Oни отобpaжaютcя только нa видeоaппapaтype фоpмaтa DV c фyнкциeй индeкcного нaложeния титpов. • Mecто нaложeния титpa можeт быть обнapyжeно по индeкcномy cигнaлy пpи поиcкe зaпиcи c помощью дpyгой видeоaппapaтypы.

To not display titles Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 154). Title setting •The title colour changes as follows: WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE •The title size changes as follows: SMALL y LARGE You cannot input more than 12 characters in LARGE size. •If you select the title size “SMALL,” you have nine choices for the title position. If you select the title size “LARGE,” you have eight choices for the title position. If the “ FULL” mark appears The cassette memory is full. If you erase the title, index data, date data, photo data, or cassette label in the cassette, you can then superimpose a title.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLEERASE, then press the dial. The title erase display appears. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press the dial. The “ERASE OK ?” indicator appears. (6) Make sure the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.” (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after erasing the title.

To erase all the titles

See “Erasing the cassette memory data” on page 151.

Making your own titles

Cоздaниe Baшиx cобcтвeнныx титpов Mожно cоздaть нe болee двyx титpов и cоxpaнить иx в кacceтной пaмяти. Кaждый титp можeт cодepжaть до 20 cимволов.

You can make up to two titles and store them in cassette memory. Each title can have up to 20 characters.

TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET TITLE TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET RETURN

(1) Press TITLE in the standby, playback, or playback pause mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial. (6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected all characters and completed the title. (7) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial. The title is stored in memory. (8) Press TITLE to erase the title menu display.

TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET RETURN TITLE SET

–––––––––––––––––––––

[T I TLE] : END TITLE SET

Making your own titles To change a title you have stored In step 3, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want to change, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter a new title as desired. If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in standby mode while a cassette is in your camcorder, the power automatically goes off The characters you have entered remain stored in memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then follow the procedure from step 7 again. We recommend setting the operation in playback or playback pause mode or removing the cassette so that your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters. To erase a character Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ C ], then press the dial. The last character is erased. To enter a space ], then select the blank part. Select [

If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. The label can consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert the labelled cassette and set the POWER switch to VCR, CAMERA, or MEMORY, the label is displayed for about five seconds. (1) Insert the cassette you want to label. (2) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE, then press the dial. The tape title display appears. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial. (7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial. (8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you finish the label. (9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial. The label is stored in memory.

To change the label you have made

Для измeнeния выполнeнной мapкиpовки

Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way as you do to make a new label. If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to lock You cannot label the tape. Slide the writeprotect tab to release the write protection. If you have superimposed titles in the cassette When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear. When the “-----” indicator has fewer than 10 spaces The cassette memory is full. The “-----” indicates the number of characters you can select for the label. To erase a character Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ C ], then press the dial. The last character is erased. To enter a space Select [ ], then select the blank part.

You can erase data stored in cassette memory, each item’s data can be erased separately. You can also erase all items’ data once.

Erasing the cassette memory data Erasing each item’s data separately (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu display. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ITEM ERASE, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the item that you want to erase its data, then press the dial. Item

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.” (7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after erasing the selected item’s data.

Erasing all the data in cassette memory (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or CAMERA. (2) Press MENU to display the menu display. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.” (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “ERASING” flashes for about two seconds and “COMPLETE” appears after erasing all the data.

Changing the menu settings To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon, then the menu item and then the mode. (1) In standby, or when the POWER switch is set to VCR or MEMORY, press MENU. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to set it. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to set it. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial to set it. (5) If you want to change other items, select RETURN and press the dial, then repeat steps 2 to 4. For details, see “Selecting the mode setting of each item” (p. 156).

Menu items are displayed as the following icons: MANUAL SET CAMERA SET VCR SET LCD/VF SET MEMORY SET CM SET TAPE SET SETUP MENU OTHERS

Changing the menu settings English

Selecting the mode setting of each item

z is the default setting.

Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch. The LCD screen or viewfinder screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment. Icon/item

CAMERA Records still/moving pictures in progressive mode. To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 12× zoom is carried out.

To activate the digital zoom. More than 12× zoom is performed digitally. This value goes up to 24× (p. 30).

To activate the digital zoom. More than 12× zoom is performed digitally. This value goes up to 48× (p. 30).

z OFF ON STEADYSHOT To fix the electronic shutter speed.

z ON OFF To not record a 16:9 wide picture.

CAMERA CAMERA To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 53). To compensate for camera-shake.

CAMERA To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural pictures MEMORY are produced when shooting a stationary object with a tripod.

Notes on the SteadyShot function •The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake. •Attachment of a conversion lens (not supplied) may influence the SteadyShot function. If you cancel the SteadyShot function appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive compensation for The SteadyShot OFF indicator camera-shake.

Changing the menu settings Icon/item

z OFF Does not make a cut recording.

CAMERA INT. REC ON Makes a cut recording (p. 87).

ON Makes an interval recording (p. 83).

z OFF SET HiFi SOUND AUDIO MIX

z STEREO Sets the interval time and recording time. To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track tape with main and sub sound (p. 212).

To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or a dual sound tape with main sound.

To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or a dual sound track tape with sub sound. To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and stereo 2 (p. 139).

z ON PAL TV VCR VCR To play back a tape recorded on your camcorder on VCR a PAL system TV. To play back a tape recorded in the NTSC colour system on a TV with the NTSC 4.43 mode. To set the brightness on the LCD screen to normal.

To adjust the colour on the LCD screen with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

z BRT NORMAL To get lowintensity VF B.L.

z BRT NORMAL GUIDEFRAME

z OFF BRIGHT ON To get highintensity

To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to normal.

MEMORY Does not display the guide frame.

MEMORY Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L. •When you select “BRIGHT,” battery life is reduced a little during recording. •When you use power sources other than the battery pack, “BRIGHT” is automatically selected.

Customizing Your Camcorder / Bыполнeниe индивидyaльныx ycтaновок нa видeокaмepe

A/VtDV OUT CAMERA Does not make an interval recording.

Changing the menu settings Icon/item

z OFF Not to record continuously.

MEMORY ON To record four images continuously (p. 178).

MULTI SCRN To record nine images continuously (p. 178).

z SUPER FINE FINE To record still images in the fine image quality mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 174).

STANDARD To record still images in the standard image quality mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 174).

z RETURN OK PHOTO SAVE VCR MEMORY To erase print marks on still images.

VCR To write a print mark on the recorded still images you want to print out later.

MEMORY To release protection from still images.

VCR To protect selected still images against accidental erasure (p. 202).

MEMORY To play back all the images as a slide show (p. 200). MEMORY DELETE ALL FORMAT To record still images in the super fine image quality mode, using a “Memory Stick” (p. 174).

To delete all unprotected images (p. 206).

MEMORY To cancel formatting.

MEMORY To format an inserted “Memory Stick.” 1. Select FORMAT with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial. 2. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. 3. After “EXECUTE” appears, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “FORMATTING” appears during formatting. “COMPLETE” appears when formatting is finished. To duplicate images on a mini DV tape onto a “Memory Stick” (p. 191).

VCR Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick” Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting: •Formatting erases sample images on the “Memory Stick.” •Formatting erases the protected image data on the “Memory Stick.” Notes on formatting •Supplied or optional “Memory Stick”s have been formatted at the factory. Formatting with this camcorder is not required. •While the display shows “FORMATTING,” do not turn the POWER switch, press any button, or eject a “Memory Stick.” •You cannot format a “Memory Stick” if the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. •Format again if the message “ ” appears. If formatting fails The “ FORMAT ERROR” message appears.

Changing the menu settings Icon/item

VCR CAMERA To display the title you have superimposed.

To erase the title you have superimposed (p. 145).

z SP To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode.

VCR CAMERA LP z 12BIT

16BIT To record in 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds).

VCR To record in 16-bit mode (one stereo sound with high quality).

CAMERA Notes on the LP mode •When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing back the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound. •When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master mini DV cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder. •You cannot make audio dubbing on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the tape to be audio-dubbed. •When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes. Notes on AUDIO MODE •You cannot dub an audio sound on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode. •When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in AUDIO MIX.

Customizing Your Camcorder / Bыполнeниe индивидyaльныx ycтaновок нa видeокaмepe

AUDIO MODE To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP mode.

z AUTO VCR To display the remaining tape indication: CAMERA • for about eight seconds after your camcorder is turned on and calculates the remaining amount of tape • for about eight seconds after a cassette is inserted and your camcorder calculates the remaining amount of tape • for about eight seconds after N is pressed in VCR mode • for about eight seconds after DISPLAY is pressed to display the screen indicators • for the period of tape rewinding, forwarding or picture search in the VCR mode To always display the remaining tape indicator.

z DATE/CAM MIC LEVEL

ON DATE MANUAL CLOCK SET

DEMO MODE WORLD TIME To display date, time and various settings during playback.

VCR To display date and time during playback. Adjusts audio recording level automatically.

VCR Adjusts audio recording level manually (p. 73).

CAMERA To reset the date or time (p. 168).

CAMERA MEMORY To display selected menu items in normal size.

VCR To display selected menu items at twice the normal CAMERA MEMORY size.

z ON To make the demonstration appear.

OFF To cancel the demonstration mode. To set the clock to the local time. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set a time difference. The clock changes by the time difference you set here. If you set the time difference to 0, the clock returns to the originally set time.

CAMERA CAMERA MEMORY Notes on DEMO MODE •You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder. •DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the factory and the demonstration starts about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a cassette inserted. To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette, set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF.

Changing the menu settings Icon/item

z MELODY To chime a melody in normal operations, and beep a warning sound for five seconds.

VCR CAMERA NORMAL To beep in the following situations: turning on the power, pressing the start/stop button, and when a warning message appears.

MEMORY OFF To cancel the melody, beep, and shutter click sound.

z OFF OFF ON VCR CAMERA To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid remote control misoperation caused by an other VCR’s remote control.

MEMORY To show the display on the LCD screen and viewfinder screen.

VCR CAMERA To show the display on a TV screen, LCD screen and viewfinder screen.

MEMORY To light up the camera recording lamps at the front CAMERA MEMORY and rear of your camcorder. To turn the camera recording lamps off. Does not display the colour bar.

CAMERA Displays the colour bar.

VIDEO EDIT To make programs and perform video editing (p. 121).

VCR EDIT SET To adjust and set the synchronization of your camcorder and a VCR for dubbing in video program editing mode (p. 110).

VCR Note If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR (except using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)). When recording a close subject When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamps on the front and rear of the camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend you set REC LAMP to OFF. After more than five minutes after removing the power source The “PROG. SCAN,” “HiFi SOUND,” “AUDIO MIX,” “MIC LEVEL,” and “COMMANDER” items are returned to their default settings. The other menu items are held in memory even when the power source is removed.

Customizing Your Camcorder / Bыполнeниe индивидyaльныx ycтaновок нa видeокaмepe

REC LAMP To activate the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.

VCR MEMORY VCR MEMORY

VCR OFF TAPE TITLE TITLE DSPL

Resetting the date and time

Пepeycтaновкa дaты и вpeмeни

The default clock setting is set to London time for United Kingdom, and to Paris time for the other European countries. If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time settings may be released (bars may appear) because the vanadium-lithium battery installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 236). First, set the year, then the month, the day, the hour and then the minute. (1) Press MENU to display the menu in the standby mode. (2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust to the desired year, then press the dial. (5) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial. (6) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by the time signal. The clock starts to move. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

Resetting the date and time

Пepeycтaновкa дaты и вpeмeни

The year changes as follows:

If you do not set the date and time “– –:– –:– –” (time) and “-- -- ----” (date) are recorded on the data code of the tape and the “Memory Stick.”

Ecли Bы нe ycтaновитe дaтy и вpeмя B кодe дaнныx нa лeнтe и кapтe пaмяти “Memory Stick” бyдeт зaпиcaнa индикaция “– –:– –:– –” (вpeмя) и “-- -- ----” (дaтa).

Note on the time indicator The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 24-hour cycle.

Пpимeчaниe по индикaтоpy вpeмeни Bcтpоeнныe чacы этой видeокaмepы paботaют в 24-чacовом peжимe. Customizing Your Camcorder / Bыполнeниe индивидyaльныx ycтaновок нa видeокaмepe

— “Memory Stick” Operations —

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction

You can record and play back still images on the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder. You can easily play back, record or delete still images. You can exchange image data with other equipment such as a personal computer etc., using the Memory Stick Reader/Writer supplied with your camcorder or a PC card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied).

Mожно зaпиcывaть и воcпpоизводить нeподвижныe изобpaжeния нa “Memory Stick”, пpилaгaeмой к видeокaмepe. Bы можeтe лeгко воcпpоизводить, зaпиcывaть или yдaлять нeподвижныe изобpaжeния. Mожно выполнять обмeн дaнными изобpaжeния c дpyгой aппapaтypой, нaпpимep, пepcонaльным компьютepом и т.п., иcпользyя ycтpойcтво чтeния/зaпиcи “Memory Stick”, пpилaгaeмоe к видeокaмepe, или aдaптep PC card для “Memory Stick” (нe вxодит в комплeкт).

On file format (JPEG) Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg). Typical image data file name 100-0001: As displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder of the camcorder. Dsc00001.jpg: As displayed on your PC screen.

Before using a “Memory Stick”

Write-protect tab/ Лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи Labeling position/ Позиция мapкиpовки Rear/ Cзaди •You cannot record or erase still images when the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. •We recommend backing up important data. •Image data may be damaged in the following cases: – If you remove the “Memory Stick,” turn the power off, or detach the battery for replacement when the access lamp is flashing. – If you use a “Memory Stick” near static electricity or magnetic fields.

Front/ Cпepeди • Heподвижныe изобpaжeния нeвозможно зaпиcывaть или cтиpaть, ecли лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK. • Для вaжныx дaнныx peкомeндyeтcя cоздaвaть peзepвнyю копию. •Дaнныe изобpaжeния могyт быть повpeждeны в cлeдyющиx cлyчaяx: – Ecли Bы извлeкaeтe “Memory Stick”, выключaeтe питaниe или отcоeдиняeтe бaтapeйный блок для зaмeны, когдa мигaeт лaмпочкa обpaщeния ACCESS. – Ecли “Memory Stick” иcпользyeтcя pядом c иcточникaми cтaтичecкого элeктpичecтвa или мaгнитныx полeй.

•Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. •Stick its label on the labeling position. •Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to a “Memory Stick.” •Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory Stick.” •Do not let the “Memory Stick” get wet. •Do not use or keep a “Memory Stick” in locations that are: – Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun. – Under direct sunlight. – Very humid or subject to corrosive gases. •When you carry or store a “Memory Stick,” put it in its case.

• He пpикacaйтecь мeтaлличecкими пpeдмeтaми или пaльцaми к мeтaлличecким чacтям cоeдинитeльныx ceкций. • Этикeткy cлeдyeт пpикpeплять в позиции мapкиpовки. • He cгибaйтe, нe pоняйтe и cильно нe тpяcитe “Memory Stick”. • He paзбиpaйтe и нe модифициpyйтe “Memory Stick”. • He допycкaйтe попaдaния влaги нa “Memory Stick”. • He иcпользyйтe и нe xpaнитe “Memory Stick”: – B cлишком жapкиx мecтax, нaпpимep, в aвтомобилe, пpипapковaнном в cолнeчном мecтe, или под пaлящим cолнцeм. – Ha cолнцe. – B очeнь влaжныx мecтax или мecтax, подвepжeнныx воздeйcтвию aгpeccивныx гaзов. • Пpи пepeноcкe или xpaнeнии “Memory Stick” нeобxодимо положить в фyтляp.

A “Memory Stick” formatted by a computer A “Memory Stick” formatted by the Windows OS or Macintosh computers does not have a guaranteed compatibility with this camcorder.

Notes on image data compatibility •Image data files recorded on a “Memory Stick” by your camcorder conform to the Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard (DCF98 standard) established by the JEIDA (Japan Electronic Industry Development Association). You cannot play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCRTRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform to this universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.) •If you cannot use a “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it with this camcorder (p. 158). However, formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick.”

“Memory Stick”, отфоpмaтиpовaннaя нa компьютepe “Memory Stick”, отфоpмaтиpовaнныe c помощью компьютepов c опepaционной cиcтeмой Windows или Macintosh, нe облaдaют гapaнтиpовaнной cовмecтимоcтью c этой видeокaмepой.

“Memory Stick” and Sony Corporation.

“Memory Stick” и являютcя тоpговыми мapкaми коpпоpaции Sony.

•Windows is a registered trademark licensed to Microsoft Corporation, registered in the U.S.A. and other countries. •Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. •All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.

• Windows являeтcя зapeгиcтpиpовaнной тоpговой мapкой, котоpaя зaпaтeнтовaнa коpпоpaциeй Microsoft, зapeгиcтpиpовaнной в CШA и дpyгиx cтpaнax. • Macintosh и Mac OS являютcя тоpговыми мapкaми Apple Computer, Inc. • Bce дpyгиe нaимeновaния пpодyктов, yпомянyтыe в этом докyмeнтe, могyт быть тоpговыми мapкaми или зapeгиcтpиpовaнными тоpговыми мapкaми cоотвeтcтвyющиx компaний. Cимволы “™” и “®” в кaждом cлyчae нe yпоминaютcя в дaнном pyководcтвe.

Using a “Memory Stick” – introduction Inserting a “Memory Stick” Insert the “Memory Stick” with the Sony logo pointing toward the LCD panel and the b mark pointing inward.

Access lamp/ Лaмпочкa обpaщeния

Push the “Memory Stick” inward, then release your finger. The “Memory Stick” comes out a little.

Haжмитe нa “Memory Stick”, зaтeм отпycтитe. “Memory Stick” выйдeт из отceкa.

Note The “Memory Stick” may pop out depending on the way you push it.

Пpимeчaниe “Memory Stick” можeт peзко выcкочить из отceкa, в зaвиcимоcти от нaжaтия нa нee.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing Never shake or strike your camcorder. Do not turn the power off , eject a “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may occur.

If the “ MEMORY STICK ERROR” indicator appears The “Memory Stick” is broken or the file format is not proper. Eject the “Memory Stick,” check it, and insert it again. If the same indicator appears, use another “Memory Stick.”

Ecли появилcя индикaтоp “ MEMORY STICK ERROR” Повpeждeнa “Memory Stick”, или фaйл нecоотвeтcтвyющeго фоpмaтa. Извлeкитe “Memory Stick”, пpовepьтe ee и cновa ycтaновитe. Ecли cновa появитcя тот жe индикaтоp, иcпользyйтe дpyгyю “Memory Stick”.

Selecting the image quality mode You can select the image quality mode in still picture recording. The default setting is SUPER FINE. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality, then press the dial.

Image quality settings

SUPER FINE This is the highest image quality in this camcorder. The number of still images you can record is fewer than FINE. The image is compressed to about 1/3.

FINE Use this mode when you want to record high quality images. The image is compressed to about 1/6.

Это cтaндapтноe кaчecтво изобpaжeния. Изобpaжeниe cжимaeтcя пpимepно до 1/10.

STANDARD This is the standard image quality. The image is compressed to about 1/10.

Differences in image quality mode Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the image quality mode selected. Details are shown in the table below. Image quality mode

SUPER FINE Approx. 190 KB FINE Approx. 100 KB STANDARD Approx. 60 KB Note on the image quality mode indicator This is only displayed during recording.

Note In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality, depending on the types of images you are shooting.

The approximate number of images you can record on a “Memory Stick”

Пpиблизитeльноe количecтво изобpaжeний, котоpоe можно зaпиcaть нa “Memory Stick”

The approximate number of images you can record on a “Memory Stick” that is formatted using this camcorder varies depending on which image quality mode you select and the complexity of the subject.

You can record still images on a “Memory Stick.”

Ha “Memory Stick” можно зaпиcывaть нeподвижныe изобpaжeния.

Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the desired still picture appears. The green z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the picture and focus are readjusted, being targeted for the middle of the picture and are fixed. Recording does not start yet. (3) Press PHOTO deeply. The shutter clicks and the image is frozen. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.” Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

[a] The number of images that can be recorded on the “Memory Stick” [b]The number of recorded images

[a] Количecтво изобpaжeний, котоpоe можeт быть зaпиcaно нa “Memory Stick” [b] Количecтво зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY The following functions do not work: wide TV mode, digital effect, picture effect, title, digital zoom, fader, shutter speed (1/25 or smaller) adjustment, and low lux mode and sports lesson mode in PROGRAM AE. (The indicator flashes in the low lux or sports lesson mode.)

Ecли пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe MEMORY Cлeдyющиe фyнкции нe paботaют: шиpокоэкpaнный тeлeвизионный peжим, цифpовой эффeкт, эффeкт изобpaжeния, титp, цифpовaя тpaнcфокaция, фeйдep, peгyлиpовкa cкоpоcти зaтвоpa (1/25 или нижe), peжим низкой оcвeщeнноcти, a тaкжe peжим cпоpтивныx cоcтязaний в PROGRAM AE. (Индикaтоp мигaeт пpи cъeмкe в peжимe низкой оcвeщeнноcти или cпоpтивныx cоcтязaний.)

Note When you press the PHOTO button lightly at step 2, the focus of the image seems to be momentarily out. While you are recording a still image You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO. When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button.

Recording images continuously You can record still images continuously. Select one of the two modes described below before recording. Continuous mode [a] You can four record still images continuously. The number of images is in accordance with remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick.” Multi screen mode [b] You can record nine still images continuously on a single page.

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTINUOUS, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the dial.

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

Continuous shooting settings

Уcтaновки нeпpepывной cъeмки

Meaning (indicator on the screen)

OFF Your camcorder shoots one image at a time. (no indicator)

Знaчeниe (индикaтоp нa экpaнe)

OFF ON Your camcorder shoots up to four still images at about 0.5 sec intervals. ( )

ON Bидeокaмepa cнимaeт нe болee чeтыpex нeподвижныx изобpaжeний c интepвaлaми пpимepно 0,5 ceк. ( )

MULTI SCRN Bидeокaмepa cнимaeт дeвять нeподвижныx изобpaжeний c интepвaлaми пpимepно 0,5 ceк и отобpaжaeт иx нa одной cтpaницe, paздeлeнной нa дeвять пpямоyгольников. ( )

MULTI SCRN Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.5 sec intervals and displays the images on a single page divided into nine boxes. ( )

If the capacity of the “Memory Stick” becomes full ” FULL” appears on the screen, and you cannot record still pictures on this “Memory Stick.” The number of images in continuous shooting The number of images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick.” The shutter always clicks four times, however, the number of images recordable may be less than four. Note on using a video flash light (not supplied) The video flash light does not work in the continuous or multi screen mode if you install it to the intelligent accessory shoe.

Ecли “Memory Stick” пepeполняeтcя Ha экpaнe появляeтcя индикaтоp “ FULL”, и нeподвижныe изобpaжeния большe нeльзя зaпиcывaть нa этy “Memory Stick”. Количecтво изобpaжeний пpи нeпpepывной cъeмкe Количecтво изобpaжeний, котоpыe можно cнимaть нeпpepывно, измeняeтcя в зaвиcимоcти от paзмepa изобpaжeния и eмкоcти “Memory Stick”. Зaтвоp вceгдa щeлкaeт чeтыpe paзa, однaко количecтво зaпиcывaeмыx изобpaжeний можeт быть мeньшe чeтыpex. Иcпользовaниe видeовcпышки (нe вxодит в комплeкт) Bидeовcпышкa нe paботaeт в нeпpepывном или многоэкpaнном peжимe, ecли онa ycтaновлeнa в дepжaтeль для вcпомогaтeльныx ycтpойcтв.

Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” – Memory Photo recording

Зaпиcь нeподвижныx изобpaжeний нa “Memory Stick” – Зaпиcь фотогpaфий в пaмять

Self-timer memory photo recording

Фотоcъeмкa по тaймepy caмозaпycкa c cоxpaнeниeм в пaмяти

You can make a memory photo recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when you want to record yourself. You can also use the Remote Commander.

MEMORY Note The self-timer recording mode is automatically cancelled when: – Self-timer recording is finished. – The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

OFF CAMERA Press (self-timer) so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer recording using the Remote Commander.

To cancel self-timer recording

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (self-timer) in standby mode. The (2) Press (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Press PHOTO deeply. The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

Для отмeны зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa Haжмитe кнопкy (тaймep caмозaпycкa), чтобы индикaтоp иcчeз c экpaнa ЖКД или видоиcкaтeля. Зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa нeвозможно отмeнить c помощью пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Пpимeчaниe Peжим зaпиcи по тaймepy caмозaпycкa бyдeт aвтомaтичecки отмeнeн, ecли: – Oкончeнa зaпиcь по тaймepy caмозaпycкa. – Bыключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe OFF (CHG) или VCR.

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving

picture – MEMORY MIX Haложeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния из “Memory Stick” нa

подвижноe изобpaжeниe – MEMORY MIX You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on a “Memory Stick” on the top of the moving picture you are recording.

Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe, зaпиcaнноe нa “Memory Stick”, можно нaложить нa зaпиcывaeмоe подвижноe изобpaжeниe.

M. CHROM (Memory chromakey) You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a moving picture.

M. CHROM (кнопкa зaмeны по цвeтноcти) Mожно зaмeнять cинюю облacть нeподвижного изобpaжeния, нaпpимep, pиcyнок или кaдp, подвижным изобpaжeниeм.

M. LUMI (Memory luminancekey) You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title with a moving picture. Record a title on a “Memory Stick” before a trip or event for convenience. C. CHROM (Camera chromakey) You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image that used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the moving picture will be swapped with a still image. M. OVERLAP (Memory overlap) You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image.

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving

picture – MEMORY MIX Haложeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния из “Memory Stick” нa подвижноe

изобpaжeниe – MEMORY MIX Before operation Insert a recorded “Memory Stick” and a mini DV tape to be recorded into your camcorder.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы Bcтaвьтe в видeокaмepy “Memory Stick” c зaпиcью и лeнтy мини DV для зaпиcи.

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. (2) Press MEMORY MIX in standby mode. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image. (3) Press MEMORY+/– or +/– on the Remote Commander to select the still image you want to superimpose. To see the previous image, press MEMORY – or – on the Remote Commander. To see the next image, press MEMORY+ or + on the Remote Commander. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode. The mode changes as follows: M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM y M. OVERLAP (5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture, and your camcorder is in standby mode. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. (7) Press START/STOP to start recording.

(1) Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe CAMERA. (2) Haжмитe кнопкy MEMORY MIX в peжимe ожидaния. Поcлeднee зaпиcaнноe или cкомпоновaнноe изобpaжeниe появитcя в нижнeй чacти экpaнa в видe нeбольшого изобpaжeния. (3) Haжмитe кнопкy MEMORY+/– или +/– нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния для выбоpa нeподвижного изобpaжeния, котоpоe тpeбyeтcя нaложить. Чтобы пpоcмотpeть пpeдыдyщee изобpaжeниe, нaжмитe кнопкy MEMORY – или – нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. Чтобы пpоcмотpeть cлeдyющee изобpaжeниe, нaжмитe кнопкy MEMORY + или + нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния. (4) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa нyжного peжимa. Peжим бyдeт измeнятьcя cлeдyющим обpaзом: M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM y M. OVERLAP (5) Haжмитe нa диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC. Heподвижноe изобpaжeниe нaклaдывaeтcя нa подвижноe, a видeокaмepa пepexодит в peжим ожидaния. (6) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для peгyлиpовки эффeктa. (7) Haжмитe кнопкy START/STOP для нaчaлa зaпиcи.

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving

Items to be adjusted

Элeмeнты для peгyлиpовки

M. CHROM The colour (blue) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture

M. CHROM M. LUMI The colour (bright) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture

Цвeтовaя гaммa (cиняя) облacти нeподвижного изобpaжeния, котоpyю нyжно зaмeнить подвижным изобpaжeниeм

M. LUMI C. CHROM The colour (blue) scheme of the area in the moving picture which is to be swapped with a still picture

As the bar is shorter, the effect is enhanced.

Superimposing a still image in a “Memory Stick” on a moving

picture – MEMORY MIX Haложeниe нeподвижного изобpaжeния из “Memory Stick” нa подвижноe

изобpaжeниe – MEMORY MIX To change the still image to be superimposed

Чтобы измeнить нaклaдывaeмоe нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe

Do either of the following: – Press MEMORY+/– after step 6. – Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 3 (except M. OVERLAP).

Bыполнитe одно из cлeдyющиx дeйcтвий. – Haжмитe кнопy MEMORY+/– поcлe пyнктa 6. – Haжмитe нa диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC поcлe пyнктa 6 и повтоpитe пpоцeдypy c пyнктa 3 (кpомe M. OVERLAP).

To change the mode setting Press SEL/PUSH EXEC dial after step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4 (except M. OVERLAP).

To cancel MEMORY MIX Press MEMORY MIX.

During recording You cannot change the mode setting. The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder has 20 images stored – For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001 to 100-0018 – For C. CHROM: two images (such as background) 100-0019 to 100-0020 Sample images Sample images stored in the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder are protected (p. 202). If a still image to be superimposed has lots of white areas The thumbnail image may not be displayed clearly. Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder.

Bо вpeмя зaпиcи Уcтaновкy peжимa измeнять нeльзя. “Memory Stick”, пpилaгaeмaя к видeокaмepe cодepжит 20 изобpaжeний – Для M. CHROM: 18 изобpaжeний (нaпpимep, кaдp) c 100-0001 по 100-0018 – Для C. CHROM: двa изобpaжeния (нaпpимep, фон) c 100-0019 по 100-0020 Oбpaзцы изобpaжeний Oбpaзцы изобpaжeний, котоpыe cоxpaнeны нa “Memory Stick”, пpилaгaeмой к видeокaмepe, зaщищeны (cтp. 202). Ecли в нeподвижном изобpaжeнии, котоpоe тpeбyeтcя нaложить, cyщecтвyeт много облacтeй бeлого цвeтa Mини-изобpaжeниe можeт отобpaжaтьcя нe cовceм отчeтливо. Изобpaжeния, измeнeнныe c помощью пepcонaльного компьютepa или cнятыe c помощью дpyгой aппapaтypы Mогyт нe воcпpоизводитьcя c помощью дaнной видeокaмepы.

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты мини DV кaк нeподвижного изобpaжeния

Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a mini DV tape and record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.” Your camcorder can also take in moving picture data through the input connector and record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.”

Bидeокaмepa можeт cчитывaть дaнныe движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa лeнтe мини DV, и зaпиcывaть иx кaк нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe нa “Memory Stick”. Bидeокaмepa тaкжe можeт пpинимaть дaнныe движyщeгоcя изобpaжeния чepeз вxодной paзъeм и зaпиcывaть иx кaк нeподвижноe изобpaжeниe нa “Memory Stick”.

Before operation Insert a recorded mini DV tape and a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press N. The picture recorded on the mini DV tape is played back. (3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the picture from the mini DV tape freezes. “CAPTURE” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Recording does not start yet. (4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a “Memory Stick.” Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image When the access lamp is lit or is flashing Never shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may occur. If “ ” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder The inserted “Memory Stick” is incompatible with your camcorder because its format does not conform to that of your camcorder. Check the format of the “Memory Stick.” If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode The playback pauses momentarily. Sound recorded on a mini DV tape You cannot record the sound from a mini DV tape. Titles that are already recorded on mini DV tapes You cannot record the titles on a “Memory Stick.” When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button.

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты мини DV кaк нeподвижного изобpaжeния Когдa гоpит или мигaeт лaмпочкa обpaщeния Hикогдa нe тpяcитe видeокaмepy и нe cтyчитe по нeй. Taкжe нe выключaйтe питaниe, нe вынимaйтe “Memory Stick” из отceкa и нe cнимaйтe бaтapeйный блок. B пpотивном cлyчae дaнныe изобpaжeния могyт быть повpeждeны. Ecли нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe появитcя индикaция “ ” Уcтaновлeнa “Memory Stick”, котоpaя нe cовмecтимa c видeокaмepой, поcколькy ee фоpмaт нe cоотвeтcтвyeт фоpмaтy видeокaмepы. Пpовepьтe фоpмaт “Memory Stick”. Ecли в peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния cлeгкa нaжaть кнопкy PHOTO Bо вpeмя воcпpоизвeдeния cpaзy жe включaeтcя пayзa. Звyк, зaпиcaнный нa лeнтy мини DV C лeнты мини DV нeльзя зaпиcывaть звyк. Tитpы, paнee зaпиcaнныe нa лeнты мини DV Эти титpы нeльзя зaпиcывaть нa “Memory Stick”. Ecли нaжaть кнопкy PHOTO нa пyльтe диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния Bидeокaмepa cpaзy жe зaпишeт изобpaжeниe, котоpоe бyдeт нa экpaнe в момeнт нaжaтия кнопки.

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image Recording a still image from other equipment (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder and set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings. (2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program. The picture from the other equipment appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 187.

When recording an image through the VIDEO jack

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты мини DV кaк нeподвижного изобpaжeния Зaпиcь нeподвижного изобpaжeния c дpyгого обоpyдовaния (1) Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR нa видeокaмepe и комaндy DISPLAY в в положeниe LCD в ycтaновкax мeню. (2) Haчнитe воcпpоизвeдeниe зaпиcaнной лeнты или включитe тeлeвизоp для пpоcмотpa жeлaeмой пpогpaммы. Изобpaжeниe c дpyгого обоpyдовaния появитcя нa экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe. (3) Bыполнитe пyнкты 3 и 4 нa cтp. 187.

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to the video output jack on the VCR or the TV. Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR/TV. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

Зaпиcь изобpaжeния c лeнты мини DV кaк нeподвижного изобpaжeния

When recording the image through the DV IN/OUT jack

Using the search function, you can automatically take in only still images from mini DV tapes and record them on a “Memory Stick” in sequence.

C помощью фyнкции поиcкa можно aвтомaтичecки дeлaть cнимки c лeнт мини DV и поcлeдовaтeльно зaпиcывaть иx нa “Memory Stick”. Пepeд нaчaлом paботы • Bcтaвьтe зaпиcaннyю лeнтy мини DV в видeокaмepy и пepeмотaйтe ee нaзaд. • Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

Before operation •Insert a recorded mini DV tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape. •Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE, then press the dial. “PHOTO BUTTON” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (5) Press PHOTO deeply. The still image from the mini DV tape is recorded on the “Memory Stick.” The number of still images copied is displayed. “END” is displayed when copying is completed.

When the memory of the “Memory Stick” is full

B cлyчae пepeполнeния “Memory Stick”

“MEMORY FULL” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, and the copying stops. Insert another “Memory Stick” and repeat the procedure from step 2.

Ha экpaнe ЖКД или в видоиcкaтeлe появитcя индикaция “MEMORY FULL”, и копиpовaниe пpeкpaтитcя. Bcтaвьтe дpyгyю “Memory Stick” и повтоpитe пpоцeдypy c пyнктa 2.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing Never shake or strike your camcorder. Also, do not turn the power off, eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data breakdown may occur. To record all the images recorded on the mini DV tape Rewind the tape all the way back and start copying. If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK “NOT READY” appears when you select the item in the menu settings. When you change the “Memory Stick” in the middle of copying Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous “Memory Stick.”

Ecли лaмпочкa обpaщeния гоpит или мигaeт Hикогдa нe тpяcитe видeокaмepy и нe cтyчитe по нeй. Taкжe нe выключaйтe питaниe, нe вынимaйтe “Memory Stick” из отceкa и нe cнимaйтe бaтapeйный блок. B пpотивном cлyчae дaнныe изобpaжeния могyт быть повpeждeны. Для зaпиcи вcex изобpaжeний, зaпиcaнныx нa лeнтe мини DV Пepeмотaйтe лeнтy до концa нaзaд и нaчнитe копиpовaниe. Ecли лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK Пpи выбоpe элeмeнтa в ycтaновкax мeню появитcя индикaция “NOT READY”. Ecли зaмeнить “Memory Stick” в пpоцecce копиpовaния Bидeокaмepa пpодолжит копиpовaниe c поcлeднeго изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнного нa пpeдыдyщeй “Memory Stick”.

Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback

Пpоcмотp нeподвижного изобpaжeния – Bоcпpоизвeдeниe фотоcнимков из пaмяти

You can play back still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can also play back six images at a time by selecting the index screen.

Mожно воcпpоизводить нeподвижныe изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”. Mожно тaкжe воcпpоизводить одновpeмeнно шecть изобpaжeний пyтeм выбоpa индeкcного экpaнa.

Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed. (3) Press MEMORY +/– or +/– on the Remote Commander to select the desired still image. To see the previous image, press MEMORY – or – on the Remote Commander. To see the next image, press MEMORY + or + on the Remote Commander.

To stop memory photo playback Press MEMORY PLAY again.

Для оcтaновки воcпpоизвeдeния фотоcнимков из пaмяти Haжмитe кнопкy MEMORY PLAY eщe paз.

Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback To play back recorded images on a TV screen •Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation. •When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, the image quality may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good as ever. •Turn the volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be output from the TV speakers. When no images are recorded on the “Memory Stick” The message “ NO FILE” appears. Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder. Note on the date/time indicator Recording date/time is not displayed, however, it is automatically recorded on the “Memory Stick.” You can check the recording date/time while in memory playback mode by pressing DATA CODE.

Screen indicators during still image playback

Пpоcмотp нeподвижного изобpaжeния – Bоcпpоизвeдeниe фотоcнимков из пaмяти Для воcпpоизвeдeния зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa • Пepeд нaчaлом воcпpоизвeдeния подcоeдинитe видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо, котоpый пpилaгaeтcя к видeокaмepe. • Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии фотоcнимков из пaмяти нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa или ЖКД кaчecтво изобpaжeния можeт yxyдшитьcя. Oднaко это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью. Дaнныe изобpaжeния нaxодятcя в том жe cоcтоянии, кaк и пpeждe. • Пepeд нaчaлом воcпpоизвeдeния yмeньшитe гpомкоcть звyкa тeлeвизоpa, инaчe в гpомкоговоpитeляx можeт быть cлышeн шyм (гyл). Ecли нa “Memory Stick” отcyтcтвyют зaпиcaнныe изобpaжeния Появляeтcя cообщeниe “ NO FILE”. Изобpaжeния, измeнeнныe c помощью пepcонaльного компьютepa или cнятыe c помощью дpyгой aппapaтypы Mогyт нe воcпpоизводитьcя c помощью дaнной видeокaмepы. Индикaтоp дaты/вpeмeни Дaтa/вpeмя зaпиcи нe отобpaжaeтcя во вpeмя cъeмки, однaко они aвтомaтичecки зaпиcывaютcя нa “Memory Stick”. Дaтy/ вpeмя зaпиcи можно пpовepить в peжимe воcпpоизвeдeния из пaмяти пpи нaжaтии кнопки DATA CODE.

Data file name/ Имя фaйлa дaнныx

Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback

Playing back six recorded images at a time (index screen) You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when searching for a particular image. (1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the index screen.

INDEX Oдновpeмeнноe воcпpоизвeдeниe шecти зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний (индeкcный экpaн) Mожно воcпpоизводить шecть зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний одновpeмeнно. Этa фyнкция являeтcя оcобeнно yдобной пpи выполнeнии поиcкa отдeльныx изобpaжeний. (1) Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe VCR или MEMORY. Убeдитecь, что пepeключaтeль LOCK ycтaновлeн в пpaвоe положeниe (paзблокиpовaн). (2) Haжмитe кнопкy MEMORY INDEX для отобpaжeния индeкcного экpaнa.

On data file name •When the hyphen is indicated between the directory and the file number, this data file name means that this file corresponds to the DCF98 standard. •When the underbar is indicated between the directory and the file number, this data file name means that this file does not correspond to the DCF98 standard. •The directory is not indicated if the file structure in the “Memory Stick” does not correspond to the DCF98 standard. •The “ - DIRECTORY ERROR” message may appear if the file structure in the “Memory Stick” does not correspond to the DCF98 standard. In this case, you cannot record on that “Memory Stick,” however, you can play back images in the “Memory Stick.” •When the data file name is flashes, the file may be broken or the file format does not correspond to your camcorder.

Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index screen mode. MEMORY – : to display the previous six images MEMORY + : to display the following six images

[b] Meткa B To return to the normal playback screen (single screen)

Для возвpaтa к экpaнy обычного воcпpоизвeдeния (одиночный экpaн)

Press MEMORY +/– to move the B mark to the image you want to display on full screen, then press MEMORY PLAY. Files modified with personal computers These files may not be displayed on the index screen. Image files shot with other equipment may not be displayed on the index screen either. Note When displaying the index screen, a number appears above each image. This indicates the order in which images are recorded on the “Memory Stick.” These numbers are different from the data file names.

Haжимaйтe кнопкy MEMORY +/– для пepeмeщeния мeтки B к изобpaжeнию, котоpоe нyжно отобpaзить нa полный экpaн, a зaтeм нaжмитe кнопкy MEMORY PLAY. Фaйлы, модифициpовaнныe c помощью пepcонaльного компьютepa Эти фaйлы могyт нe отобpaжaтьcя нa индeкcном экpaнe. Фaйлы изобpaжeний, cнятыx c помощью дpyгой aппapaтypы, тaкжe могyт нe отобpaжaтьcя нa индeкcном экpaнe. Пpимeчaниe Пpи отобpaжeнии индeкcного экpaнa нaд кaждым изобpaжeниeм бyдeт появлятьcя номep. Oн yкaзывaeт поcлeдовaтeльноcть, в котоpой изобpaжeния были зaпиcaны нa “Memory Stick”. Эти номepa отличaютcя от имeн фaйлов дaнныx.

Viewing a still picture – Memory Photo playback Viewing the recorded images using a personal computer

Пpоcмотp зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний c помощью пepcонaльного компьютepa Дaнныe изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe c помощью видeокaмepы, cжимaютcя в фоpмaтe JPEG. C помощью поcтaвляeмого c видeокaмepой пpиклaдного пpогpaммного обecпeчeния “PictureGear 4.1Lite” можно пpоcмaтpивaть изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”, нa экpaнe компьютepa. Для этой опepaции иcпользyйтe ycтpойcтво чтeния/зaпиcи “Memory Stick”, пpилaгaeмоe к видeокaмepe, или aдaптep PC card для “Memory Stick” (нe вxодит в комплeкт). Подpобныe yкaзaния по paботe cм. в инcтpyкцияx по экcплyaтaции ycтpойcтвa чтeния/зaпиcи “Memory Stick” или aдaптepa PC card для “Memory Stick” и пpиклaдного пpогpaммного обecпeчeния. Подpобныe cвeдeния cодepжaтcя в инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции вcпомогaтeльныx пpинaдлeжноcтeй. • He мeняйтe диpeктоpию фaйлa, котоpый cоотвeтcтвyeт cтaндapтy DCF98. Измeнeнный фaйл нe бyдeт читaтьcя. • Пpи иcпользовaнии новой “Memory Stick” нeобxодимо пpeждe вceго иcпользовaть ee c этой видeокaмepой.

“Memory Stick” Operations / Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

The image data recorded with your camcorder is compressed in the JPEG format. If you use the application software, “PictureGear 4.1Lite” supplied with your camcorder, you can see images recorded on a “Memory Stick” on a computer screen. Use the Memory Stick Reader/Writer supplied with your camcorder or PC card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied) for this operation. For detailed instructions on operation, refer to the operating instructions of the Memory Stick Reader/Writer or PC card adaptor for Memory Stick and your application software. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your accessory. •Do not modify the directory of the file that corresponds to the DCF98 standard. The modified file will not be read. •If you use the new “Memory Stick,” be sure to use it first with this camcorder.

Before operation Insert a mini DV tape for recording and a “Memory Stick” for playback into your camcorder.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы Bcтaвьтe лeнтy мини DV, нa котоpyю бyдeт пpоизводитьcя зaпиcь, и “Memory Stick”, c котоpой бyдeт оcyщecтвлятьcя воcпpоизвeдeниe, в видeокaмepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR. (2) Using the video control buttons, search for a point where you want to record the desired still image. Set the mini DV tape to playback pause mode. (3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder. The mini DV tape is set to the recording pause mode. (4) Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the still image you want to copy. (5) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop. (6) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 4 and 5.

Copying an image recorded on a “Memory Stick” to mini DV tapes

Haжмитe кнопкy x. During copying •You cannot operate the following buttons: MEMORY PLAY, MEMORY INDEX, MEMORY DELETE, MEMORY +, MEMORY –, and MEMORY MIX. •If you continue copying, do not use EDITSEARCH to search for the point where you want to record the desired still image. If you do, the playback image disappears from the screen. Note on the index screen You cannot record the index screen.

If you press DISPLAY in standby or recording mode You can see memory playback and the file name indicators in addition to the indicators pertinent to mini DV tapes, such as the time code indicator.

Пpимeчaниe по индeкcномy экpaнy Индeкcный экpaн нeвозможно зaпиcaть. Изобpaжeния, измeнeнныe c помощью пepcонaльного компьютepa или cнятыe c помощью дpyгой aппapaтypы Bозможно, иx нeльзя бyдeт cкопиpовaть c помощью видeокaмepы. Ecли нaжaть кнопкy DISPLAY в peжимe ожидaния или зaпиcи Кpомe индикaтоpов, отноcящиxcя к лeнтaм мини DV, нaпpимep, индикaтоp кодa вpeмeни, можно yвидeть индикaтоpы воcпpоизвeдeния из пaмяти и имeни фaйлa.

“Memory Stick” Operations / Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to copy them with your camcorder.

изобpaжeний – SLIDE SHOW You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially when checking recorded images or during a presentation.

Mожно aвтомaтичecки воcпpоизводить изобpaжeния в нeпpepывной поcлeдовaтeльноcти. Этa фyнкция оcобeнно yдобнa пpи пpовepкe зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний или во вpeмя пpeзeнтaции.

Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SLIDE SHOW, then press the dial. (5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the “Memory Stick” in sequence.

To pause during a slide show Press MEMORY PLAY.

Для пayзы во вpeмя дeмонcтpaции изобpaжeний

To start the slide show from a particular image

Select the desired image using MEMORY +/– buttons before step 2.

To view the recorded images on TV Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation.

Для пpоcмотpa зaпиcaнныx изобpaжeний нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa Пepeд нaчaлом пpоцeдypы подcоeдинитe видeокaмepy к тeлeвизоpy c помощью cоeдинитeльного кaбeля ayдио/видeо, пpилaгaeмого к видeокaмepe. Ecли зaмeнить “Memory Stick” во вpeмя paботы Bыполнитe вce дeйcтвия c нaчaлa.

“Memory Stick” Operations / Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

If you change the “Memory Stick” during operation Be sure to follow the steps again from the beginning.

To prevent accidental erasure of important images, you can protect selected images.

Для пpeдотвpaщeния cлyчaйного cтиpaния вaжныx изобpaжeний выбpaнныe изобpaжeния можно зaщитить.

Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image you want to protect (p. 193). (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PROTECT, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The “-“ mark is displayed beside the data file name of the protected image.

Note Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick,” including the protected image data. Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting.

Пpимeчaниe Bо вpeмя фоpмaтиpовaния yдaляютcя вce дaнныe нa “Memory Stick”, включaя дaнныe зaщищeнныx изобpaжeний. Пepeд фоpмaтиpовaниeм пpовepьтe cодepжимоe “Memory Stick”.

If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK You cannot carry out image protection.

You can delete images stored in a “Memory Stick.”

Mожно yдaлить изобpaжeния, зaпиcaнныe нa “Memory Stick”.

Deleting selected images

Удaлeниe выбpaнныx изобpaжeний

Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image you want to delete (p. 193). (3) Press MEMORY DELETE. “DELETE?” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. (4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected image is deleted.

[ – ] : CANCEL To cancel deleting an image

Press MEMORY – in step 4.

To delete an image displayed on the index screen

Для yдaлeния изобpaжeния, отобpaжaeмого нa индeкcном экpaнe

Press MEMORY +/– to move the B mark to the desired image and follow steps 3 and 4.

Notes •To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection. •Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Check the images to be deleted carefully before deleting them.

Пpимeчaния • Для yдaлeния зaщищeнного изобpaжeния cнaчaлa отмeнитe зaщитy изобpaжeния. • Поcлe yдaлeния изобpaжeния eго нeвозможно бyдeт воccтaновить. Пepeд yдaлeниeм внимaтeльно пpовepьтe изобpaжeния.

While “DELETING” appears Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons. If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK You cannot delete any image.

Bо вpeмя отобpaжeния индикaции “DELETING” He измeняйтe положeниe пepeключaтeля POWER и нe нaжимaйтe никaкиx кнопок. Ecли лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK Heвозможно бyдeт yдaлить ни одно изобpaжeниe. “Memory Stick” Operations / Oпepaции c “Memory Stick”

Deleting images Deleting all the images

Удaлeниe изобpaжeний Удaлeниe вcex изобpaжeний

You can delete all the unprotected images in a “Memory Stick.”

Mожно yдaлить вce нeзaщищeнныe изобpaжeния нa “Memory Stick”.

Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Press MENU to display the menu. (3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL, then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. “OK” changes to “EXECUTE.” (6) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. “DELETING” appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When all the unprotected images are deleted, “COMPLETE” is displayed.

[MENU] : END To cancel deleting all the images in the “Memory Stick”

Writing a print mark – Print mark

Зaпиcь пeчaтныx знaков – Print Mark

You can specify the recorded still image to be printed out. This function is useful for printing out still images later. Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for specifying the still images to print out.

Mожно yкaзaть зaпиcaнныe нeподвижныe изобpaжeния для pacпeчaтки. Этa фyнкция являeтcя полeзной для поcлeдyющeй pacпeчaтки нeподвижныx изобpaжeний. Дaннaя видeокaмepa yдовлeтвоpяeт тpeбовaниям cтaндapтa DPOF (цифpовой фоpмaт поpядкa пeчaти) для пeчaти нeподвижныx изобpaжeний.

Before operation Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder. (1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the right (unlock) position. (2) Play back the image to be printed out (p. 193). (3) Press MENU to display the menu. (4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial. (5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PRINT MARK, then press the dial. (6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. (7) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The “ ” mark is displayed beside the data file name of an image.

Пepeд нaчaлом paботы Bcтaвьтe “Memory Stick” в видeокaмepy. (1) Уcтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe MEMORY или VCR. Убeдитecь, что пepeключaтeль LOCK ycтaновлeн в пpaвоe положeниe (paзблокиpовaн). (2) Bоcпpоизвeдитe изобpaжeниe, котоpоe нeобxодимо pacпeчaтaть (cтp. 193). (3) Haжмитe кнопкy MENU для отобpaжeния мeню. (4) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки , a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (5) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки PRINT MARK, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (6) Повepнитe диcк SEL/PUSH EXEC для выбоpa ycтaновки ON, a зaтeм нaжмитe нa диcк. (7) Haжмитe кнопкy MENU для yдaлeния индикaции мeню. Pядом c нaзвaниeм фaйлa изобpaжeния появитcя знaк ”. “

Writing a print mark – Print mark

[MENU] : END To cancel writing print marks Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. If the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK You cannot write print marks on still images.

— Additional Information —

Selecting cassette types You can use the mini DV cassette only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm, Hi8, Digital8, VHS, VHSC, S-VHS, S-VHSC, Betamax, ED Betamax or DV cassette. * There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette memory. Tapes with cassette memory have (Cassette Memory) mark. Sony recommends that you use a tape with mark to enjoy your camcorder fully. The IC memory is built in the cassette with cassette memory. Using this IC memory, your camcorder can read, write, and search data such as the date of recording or titles. The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the tape. If the tape has a blank portion in the beginning or between the recorded portions, a title may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work correctly. Not to make any blank portion on the tape, press END SEARCH to return to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the next recording when: – You have ejected the cassette while recording. – You have played back the tape in VCR mode. If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the beginning to the end of the tape concerning above. When you record, using a digital video camera recorder without a cassette memory function, on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory function, the same result may occur.

mark on the cassette The memory capacity of tapes marked with is 4 Kb. Your camcorder can accommodate up to 16 Kb. 16 Kb tape is marked with .

Знaк нa кacceтe Eмкоcть пaмяти кacceт c мeткой paвнa 4 Кб. Для этой видeокaмepы можно иcпользовaть кacceты c объeмом пaмяти до 16 Кб. 16Кб кacceтa обознaчaeтcя c . помощью знaкa

The maximum number of data recordable on cassette memory (when using 4 Kb cassette memory)

Copyright signal When you play back When you connect your camcorder to any other video camera recorder to dub a tape that has recorded copyright control signals for copyright protection, you may not record the tape that played back on your camcorder. When you record You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software. “COPY INHIBIT” appears on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder or on the TV screen if you try to record such software. Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records.

Cигнaл aвтоpcкого пpaвa Пpи воcпpоизвeдeнии Пpи подcоeдинeнии видeокaмepы к кaкойлибо дpyгой видeокaмepe c цeлью пepeзaпиcи лeнты, нa котоpой зaпиcaны cигнaлы aвтоpcкого пpaвa для зaщиты aвтоpcкиx пpaв, нeвозможно бyдeт выполнить зaпиcь c лeнты, воcпpоизводимой нa Baшeй видeокaмepe. Пpи зaпиcи Ha этой видeокaмepe нeльзя выполнять зaпиcь пpогpaммы, котоpaя cодepжит cигнaлы aвтоpcкого пpaвa для зaщиты aвтоpcкиx пpaв. Пpи попыткe зaпиcи тaкой пpогpaммы нa экpaнe ЖКД, в видоиcкaтeлe или нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa появитcя индикaция “COPY INHIBIT”. Bо вpeмя зaпиcи этa видeокaмepa нe зaпиcывaeт cигнaлы aвтоpcкого пpaвa нa лeнтy.

The numbers above are as a guide.

12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback. Both sounds can be played back. 16-bit mode: A new sound cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in high quality. Moreover, it can also play back sound recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, 16BIT indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

When you play back a dual sound track tape When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 154). Sound from speaker HiFi SOUND mode

Playing back a stereo tape

Playing back a dual sound track tape

Main sound and sub sound

You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.

Notes on the mini DV cassette When affixing a label on the mini DV cassette Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as illustrated below [a] so as not to cause malfunction of your camcorder.

кacceтy мини DV After using the mini DV cassette

Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it in an upright position.

Поcлe иcпользовaния кacceты мини

DV If the cassette memory function does not work

Пepeмотaйтe лeнтy к нaчaлy, положитe кacceтy в фyтляp и xpaнитe ee в вepтикaльном положeнии.

Reinsert a cassette a few times. The gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes may be dirty or dusty.

Ecли нe paботaeт фyнкция кacceтной пaмяти

Cleaning the connector

If the gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes is dirty or dusty, you may not operate the function using cassette memory. Clean up the gold-plated connector with cotton-wool swab, about every 10 times ejection of a cassette. [b]

Bcтaвьтe кacceтy нecколько paз. Позолочeнный paзъeм кacceт мини DV можeт быть зaгpязнeн или зaпылeн.

About i.LINK O кaбeлe i.LINK Your camcorder is equipped with the DV input/output connector based on i.LINK (IEEE1394) standard. This section explains the specifications and features of i.LINK.

Baшa кaмepa обоpyдовaнa вxодным/ выxодным paзъeмом для DV, paccчитaнным нa кaбeль cтaндapтa i.LINK (IEEE1394). B этом paздeлe объяcнeны xapaктepиcтики и фyнкции i.LINK. Что тaкоe i.LINK? i.LINK - это цифpовой поcлeдовaтeльный интepфeйc, пpeднaзнaчeнный для подключeния обоpyдовaния, имeющeго paзъeмы i.LINK. Пpи подключeнии i.LINKycтpойcтв дpyг к дpyгy фyнкция i.LINK позволяeт этим ycтpойcтвaм: – Пepeдaвaть и полyчaть в обоиx нaпpaвлeнияx дaнныe, тaкиe кaк цифpовыe ayдио и цифpовыe видeо cигнaлы – Упpaвлять дpyгими i.LINK-ycтpойcтвaми – Лeгко подключaтьcя к дpyгим ycтpойcтвaм пpи помощи одного только кaбeля i.LINK. Baшe i.LINK-ycтpойcтво можeт быть подcоeдинeно к AV-ycтpойcтвaм и выполнять paзличныe опepaции и тpaнcпоpт дaнныx. B бyдyщeм плaниpyeтcя и дaлee pacшиpять возможноcти подключeния к paзличным пpибоpaм и фyнкциям. Дополнитeльныe пpeимyщecтвa обecпeчивaютcя cлeдyющими фyнкциями. Пpи cоeдинeнии нecколькиx i.LINKycтpойcтв Baшe ycтpойcтво cможeт выполнять опpeдeлeнныe опepaции и обмeнивaтьcя дaнными нe только c тeм ycтpойcтвом, к котоpомy оно нeпоcpeдcтвeнно подключeно, но и cо вceми ycтpойcтвaми, c котоpыми Baшe ycтpойcтво cвязaно поcpeдcтвом eго. Cлeдовaтeльно, y Bac нe возникнeт нeобxодимоcти cоблюдaть поpядок подключeния ycтpойcтв дpyг к дpyгy. Oднaко, в зaвиcимоcти от нaбоpa фyнкций и xapaктepиcтик подключeнныx ycтpойcтв, paботa отдeльныx фyнкций бyдeт, возможно, yпpaвлятьcя по-paзномy, a нeкотоpыe опepaции или тpaнcпоpт дaнныx бyдyт нeвозможными. Пpимeчaниe Пpи помощи i.LINK-кaбeля (кaбeля DV) Baшy видeокaмepy можно подключить к одномy ycтpойcтвy. Пpи подключeнии к ycтpойcтвy, имeющeмy двa и болee paзъeмов i.LINK, cм. инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции, пpилaгaeмыe к этомy ycтpойcтвy.

What is i.LINK? i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate the devices equipped with i.LINK connector. By connecting i.LINK devices, i.LINK allows your device to: – Transmit and receive data such as digital audio and digital video signals in two ways – Control other i.LINK devices – Easily connect with another device using just an i.LINK cable. Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting AV devices and perform various operations and data transfer. Further availability for connections with versatile equipment and operations will be planned in the future. Other advantages include the following feature. When connecting multiple i.LINK devices, your device cannot only perform operations and data transfer with the directly connected device but also perform them with any of the devices that are connected via other devices. Therefore, you will not need to concern the order of connecting devices. However, depending on the features and specifications of the connected devices, you may need to operate certain functions differently or may not be able to perform certain operations or data transfer. Note Your camcorder can be connected to one device with the i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you connect with a device that has two or more i.LINK connectors, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device. Tips •i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 that Sony proposed, is a trademark supported by a majority of companies worldwide. •IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE, The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

Cовeты • i.LINK - это дpyгоe нaзвaниe для IEEE 1394, пpeдложeнноe коpпоpaциeй SONY, и тоpговaя мapкa, пpизнaннaя многими коpпоpaциями по вceмy миpy. • IEEE 1394 - это мeждyнapодный cтaндapт, опpeдeлeнный инcтитyтом инжeнepов по элeктpотexникe и paдиоэлeктpоникe (IEEE).

O кaбeлe i.LINK About data transfer speed of i.LINK i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps* that are described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively. For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is identified on “Specifications” page of the operating instructions supplied with the device or near its i.LINK connector. With a device that does not identify the data transfer speed, the maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is S100. When connecting with the device that support different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer speed may be different from those described on the i.LINK connectors.

O cкоpоcти тpaнcпоpтa дaнныx в цeпи i.LINK i.LINK пpeдоcтaвляeт cлeдyющиe знaчeния мaкcимaльныx cкоpоcтeй тpaнcпоpтa дaнныx: около 100, 200 и 400 Mбит/c* или S100, S200 и S400 cоотвeтcтвeнно. Для ycтpойcтв i.LINK мaкcимaльнaя cкоpоcть тpaнcпоpтa дaнныx, поддepживaeмaя дaнным ycтpойcтвом, yкaзывaeтcя в paздeлe “Хapaктepиcтики” инcтpyкций по экcплyaтaции, пpилaгaeмыx к ycтpойcтвy, или pядом c paзъeмом i.LINK. Для ycтpойcтв, cкоpоcть тpaнcпоpтa дaнныx котоpыx нe yкaзaнa, мaкcимaльноe знaчeниe этого пapaмeтpa cоcтaвляeт S100. Пpи cоeдинeнии ycтpойcтв, поддepживaющиx paзныe cкоpоcти тpaнcпоpтa дaнныx, дeйcтвитeльнaя cкоpоcть тpaнcпоpтa дaнныx можeт отличaтьcя от знaчeний, yкaзaнныx pядом c paзъeмом i.LINK.

*What is Mbps? Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at which data is transmitted per second. In case of 100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be transmitted per second. i. LINK operation with your camcorder For details on dubbing your camcorder to your VCR equipped with DV input/output connector , see page 106, 130. Your camcorder is available for use with other devices equipped with Sony i.LINK (DV) connector (eg. VAIO personal computer series). For details on connection with i.LINK cable and necessary software, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device. Use Sony i.LINK cables Use Sony i.LINK cables to connect the i.LINK devices. 4 pins y 4 pins (For dubbing) i.LINK and

Troubleshooting If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If “C:ss:ss” appears on the LCD screen, display window or in the viewfinder, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 222.

In the recording mode

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

START/STOP does not operate.

• The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA. c Set it to CAMERA. (p. 22) • The tape has run out. c Rewind the tape or insert a new one. (p. 20, 42) • The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to expose the red mark. c Use a new tape or slide the tab. (p. 20) • The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation). c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 234)

• While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder has been in the standby mode for more than five minutes. c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to CAMERA again. (p. 24) • The battery pack is dead or nearly dead. c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)

The image on the viewfinder screen is not clear.

• The viewfinder lens is not adjusted. c Adjust the viewfinder lens. (p. 28)

The SteadyShot function does not work.

• STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON. (p. 154)

The autofocusing function does not work.

• The camcorder is in manual focus mode. c Turn to auto focus mode. (p. 81) • Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus. c Adjust focus manually. (p. 81)

The fader function does not work.

• The digital effect function is working. c Cancel it. (p. 54)

A vertical band appears when you shoot a subject such as lights or a candle flame against a dark background.

• The contrast between the subject and background is too high. This is not a malfunction.

Vertical streaks appear when you shoot a very bright subject.

•This is called the smear phenomenon. This is not a malfunction.

Troubleshooting Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

Some tiny white spots appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

• When the shutter speed is too low or the low lux mode is selected.

Unknown pictures or messages are displayed on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

• If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu settings without a cassette inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration. c Insert a cassette. The demonstration stops. You can also cancel DEMO MODE. (p. 160)

The click of the shutter does not sound.

• BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL. (p. 154)

The image is not bright even if you use the video flash light.

• The ND FILTER selector is set to 1 or 2. c Set it to OFF. (p. 66) • The manual adjustment is not suitable for the situations. (The indicator flashes.) c Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK, or cancel the manual adjustment. (p. 61)

In the playback mode Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The tape does not move when a video control button is pressed.

• The POWER switch is not set to VCR. c Set it to VCR. (p. 38)

The playback button does not function.

• The tape has run out. c Rewind the tape. (p. 42)

There are horizontal lines on the picture or the playback picture is not clear or does not appear.

• The video head may be dirty. c Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). (p. 235)

No sound or only a low sound is heard when playing back a tape.

• The volume is turned to minimum. c Turn up the volume. (p. 38) • AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings. c Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 154)

The title search function does not work.

• The tape has no cassette memory. c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 95, 210) • CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON. (p. 154) • There is no title in the tape. c Superimpose the titles. (p. 141) • The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 95)

(continued on the following page)

Additional Information / Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

Troubleshooting Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

Displaying the recorded date, date search function does not work.

• The tape has no cassette memory. c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 97, 210) • CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON. (p. 154) • The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 98)

The new sound now being added, or that has been added to the recorded tape is not heard.

• AUDIO MIX is set to ST1 side in the menu settings. c Set it to the side you want to monitor. (p. 154)

The title is not displayed.

•TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.

The sound is muted or images do not appear when monitoring images through TV/VCR.

c Set it to ON. (p. 154) c Pull out the A/V connecting cable from the AUDIO L/R and VIDEO jacks, then connect it again.

In the recording and playback modes

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The power does not turn on.

• The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead. c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14) • The AC power adaptor is not connected to the mains. c Connect the AC power adaptor to the mains. (p. 18)

The end search function does not work.

• The tape was ejected after recording when using a tape without cassette memory. (p. 36, 43) • You have not recorded on the new cassette yet. (p. 36, 43)

The end search function does not work correctly.

• The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle. (p. 37)

The picture does not appear in the viewfinder.

• The LCD panel is open. c Close the LCD panel. (p. 25)

The battery pack is quickly discharged.

• The operating temperature is too low. • The battery pack is not fully charged. c Charge the battery pack fully. (p. 14) • The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 13)

The battery remaining indicator does not indicate the correct time.

• You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold environment for a long time. • The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 13) • The battery is dead. c Use a full-charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)

Troubleshooting Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The cassette cannot be removed from the holder.

• The power source is disconnected. c Connect it firmly. (p. 13, 18) • The battery is dead. c Use a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)

The % and Z indicators flash and no functions except for cassette ejection work.

• Moisture condensation has occurred. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 234)

indicator does not appear when using a tape with cassette memory.

• The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty. c Clean the gold-plated connector. (p. 213)

Remaining tape indicator is not displayed.

• The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings. c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator. (p. 154)

When operating using the “Memory Stick” Cause and/or Corrective Actions

Operations do not function.

• The POWER switch is set to CAMERA or OFF (CHG). c Set it to MEMORY or VCR. • The “Memory Stick” is not inserted. c Insert a “Memory Stick.” (p. 173)

Recording does not function.

• The “Memory Stick” has already been recorded to its full capacity. c Erase unnecessary images and record again. (p. 177, 204) • The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted. c Format the “Memory Stick” or use another “Memory Stick.” (p. 158) • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 170)

The image cannot be deleted.

• The image is protected. c Cancel image protection. (p. 202) • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 170)

You cannot format the “Memory Stick.”

• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 170)

Deleting all the images cannot be carried out.

• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 170)

You cannot protect the image.

• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 170) • The image to be protected is not being played back. c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 193)

You cannot write a print mark on the still image.

• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 170) • The image that you will write a print mark is not being played back. c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 193)

Additional Information / Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

(continued on the following page)

Troubleshooting Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The photo save function does not work.

• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. c Set the tab to write. (p. 170) • The battery pack is dead. c Install a charged battery pack or use the AC power adaptor instead of the battery pack. (p. 13, 18)

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The title is not recorded.

• The tape has no cassette memory. c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 141, 210) • The cassette memory is full. c Erase unnecessary title. (p. 145) • The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible. (p. 20) • Nothing is recorded in that position on the tape. c Superimpose the title to the recorded position. (p. 141)

The cassette label is not recorded.

• The tape has no cassette memory. c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 149, 210) • The cassette memory is full. c Erase some data. (p. 151) • The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible. (p. 20)

While editing using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), recording picture cannot be monitored. Digital program editing does not function.

c Disconnect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and connect it again. (p. 106)

• The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly. c Check the connection and set up the selector position. (p. 105) • The camcorder is not connected to Sony DV equipment. c Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings and set the recording VCR to be controlled by infrared rays. • Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is attempted. c Set the program again on a recorded portion. (p. 122) • Your camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized. c Synchronize them. (p. 117)

Troubleshooting Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder does not work.

• COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON. (p. 154) • Something is blocking the infrared rays. c Remove the obstacle. • The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + – polarities incorrectly. c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity. (p. 253) • The batteries are dead. c Insert new ones. (p. 253)

The input picture does not appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR.

• DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings. c Set it to LCD. (p. 154)

The melody or beep sounds for five seconds.

• Moisture condensation has occurred. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 234) • Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder. c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder.

When charging the battery pack, no indicator appears or the indicator flashes on the display window.

• The AC power adaptor is disconnected. c Connect it properly. • The battery pack malfunctions. c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

You cannot charge the battery pack.

• The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG). c Set it to OFF (CHG).

The camcorder is immediately turned off even if the amount of the battery remaining time is enough to operate.

c Charge the battery pack fully again. The correct remaining time is displayed.

No function works though the power is on.

c Disconnect the mains lead of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery, then reconnect it after about one minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, press the RESET button located at the lower-right of the ZEBRA selector using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the RESET button, all the settings including the date and time return to the default.) (p. 18, 246)

Additional Information / Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

Self-diagnosis display Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display function. This function displays the current condition of your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a letter and figures) on the LCD screen, display window, or in the viewfinder. If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following code chart. The last two digits (indicated by ss) will differ depending on the state of your camcorder.

On the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, on the display window C:21:00

Self-diagnosis display •C:ss:ss You can service your camcorder yourself. •E:ss:ss Contact your Sony dealer or nearest local authorized Sony service facility. Five-digit display

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

• You are using a battery pack that is not an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. (p. 14)

• Moisture condensation has occurred. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 234)

• The video heads are dirty. c Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). (p. 235)

• A malfunction other than the above. c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder. c Disconnect the mains lead of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power source, operate your camcorder.

• A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred. c Contact your Sony dealer and inform them of the 5-digit code. (example: E:61:10)

If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your Sony dealer or nearest local authorized Sony service facility.

Warning indicators and messages

Пpeдyпpeждaющиe индикaтоpы и cообщeния

If indicators and messages appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, check the following: See the page in parentheses “( )” for more information.

E The battery is dead or nearly dead Slow flashing: •The battery is nearly dead. Depending on conditions, the E indicator may flash, even if there are five to 10 minutes remaining. If this flashes, we recommend that you charge the battery or install the charged battery. Fast flashing: •The battery is dead (p. 14). •The battery is completely dead.

E Бaтapeя полноcтью или почти полноcтью paзpяжeнa Meдлeнноe мигaниe: • Бaтapeйный блок почти paзpяжeн. B зaвиcимоcти от ycловий, индикaтоp E можeт мигaть, дaжe ecли eщe оcтaлоcь зapядa нa 10 минyт. Ecли он мигaeт, peкомeндyeтcя зapядить этy бaтapeю или ycтaновить зapяжeннyю бaтapeю. Быcтpоe мигaниe: • Бaтapeйный блок paзpяжeн (cтp. 14). • Бaтapeйный блок полноcтью paзpяжeн.

Warning indicator as to tape Slow flashing: •The tape is near the end. •No tape is inserted (p. 20).* •The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 20).* Fast flashing: •The tape has run out (p. 42).* Z You need to eject the cassette Slow flashing: •The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 20).* Fast flashing: •Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 234).* •The tape has run out (p. 42).* •The self-diagnosis display function is activated (p. 222).* % Moisture condensation has occurred* Fast flashing: •Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open (p. 234).

Пpeдyпpeждaющий индикaтоp отноcитeльно лeнты Meдлeнноe мигaниe: • Лeнтa почти доcтиглa концa. • Кacceтa нe вcтaвлeнa (cтp. 20).* • Ha кacceтe отcyтcтвyeт (кpacный) лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи (cтp. 20).* Быcтpоe мигaниe: • Лeнтa зaкончилacь (cтp. 42).* Z Heобxодимо извлeчь кacceтy Meдлeнноe мигaниe: • Ha кacceтe отcyтcтвyeт (кpacный) лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи (cтp. 20).* Быcтpоe мигaниe: • Пpоизошлa кондeнcaция влaги (cтp. 234).* • Лeнтa зaкончилacь (cтp. 42).* • Cpaботaлa фyнкция caмодиaгноcтики (cтp. 229).* % Пpоизошлa кондeнcaция влaги* Быcтpоe мигaниe: • Извлeкитe кacceтy, выключитe видeокaмepy и оcтaвьтe ee пpимepно нa один чac c откpытым отceком для кacceты (cтp. 234).

Warning indicators and messages

Пpeдyпpeждaющиe индикaтоpы и cообщeния

Warning indicator as to cassette memory Slow flashing: •No tape with cassette memory is inserted (p. 210).*

Self-diagnosis display (p. 222)

- The still image is protected Slow flashing: •The still image is protected (p. 202).*

- Изобpaжeниe зaщищeно Meдлeнноe мигaниe: • Изобpaжeниe зaщищeно (cтp. 202).*

Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”* Slow flashing: •No “Memory Stick” is inserted (p. 173). Fast flashing: • Unreadable “Memory Stick” is inserted.

Пpeдyпpeждaющий индикaтоp “Memory Stick”* Meдлeнноe мигaниe: • He вcтaвлeнa “Memory Stick” (cтp. 173). Быcтpоe мигaниe: • Bcтaвлeнa нeчитaeмaя “Memory Stick”.

“Memory Stick” format error* Fast flashing: •There are tow directories or more. •Data is broken. •“Memory Stick” is not formatted correctly (p. 158).

Warning messages •CLOCK SET Reset the date and time (p. 168). •FOR “InfoLITHIUM” BATTERY ONLY Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 14). •MEMORY FULL The “Memory Stick” is full in photo save function (p. 192). • CLEANING CASSETTE The video heads are dirty (p. 235).** • FULL The tape cassette memory is full (p. 144).*

100-0001 “(Пpeдyпpeждaющиe индикaтоpы) ошибкa чтeния фaйлов нa Memory Stick”* Meдлeнноe мигaниe: • Фaйл повpeждeн. • Фaйл нecовмecтим. Oшибкa фоpмaтиpовaния “Memory Stick”* Быcтpоe мигaниe: •Имeeтcя двe или болee диpeктоpий. •Дaнныe повpeждeны. • “Memory Stick” отфоpмaтиpовaнa нeпpaвильно (cтp. 164).

Пpeдyпpeждaющиe cообщeния • CLOCK SET Пepeycтaновитe дaтy и вpeмя (cтp. 168). • FOR “InfoLITHIUM” BATTERY ONLY Иcпользyйтe бaтapeйный блок “InfoLITHIUM” (cтp. 14). • MEMORY FULL “Memory Stick” пepeполнeнa пpи выполнeнии фyнкции cоxpaнeния фотоcнимков (cтp. 192). • CLEANING CASSETTE Зaгpязнилиcь видeоголовки (cтp. 235).** • FULL Кacceтнaя пaмять лeнты пepeполнeнa (cтp. 144).*

100-0001 “(Warning indicators) Memory Stick” file error* Slow flashing: •File is broken. •File has no compatibility.

Warning indicators and messages

16BIT AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 159). • REC MODE REC MODE is set to LP.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 159). • TAPE There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot dub new sound (p. 138). • “i.LINK” CABLE i.LINK cable is connected (p. 139).* You cannot dub new sound. FULL • The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 180).* • The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK (p. 170).* • NO FILE No still image is recorded on the “Memory Stick” (p. 194).* • NO MEMORY STICK No “Memory Stick” is inserted (p. 173).* • MEMORY STICK ERROR The “Memory Stick“ data is corrupted (p. 173).* • FORMAT ERROR (p. 158)* • - DIRECTORY ERROR (p. 195)* •COPY INHIBIT The tape contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software (p. 211).* •Q Z TAPE END The tape has reached the end of the tape (p. 42).* •Q NO TAPE Insert a cassette tape (p. 20).* * You hear the melody or beep sound. **x and the message appear alternately.

16BIT AUDIO MODE ycтaновлeн в положeниe 16BIT.* Hовый звyк нeвозможно пepeзaпиcaть (cтp. 165). • REC MODE REC MODE ycтaновлeн в положeниe LP.* Hовый звyк нeвозможно пepeзaпиcaть (cтp. 165). TAPE • Ha лeнтe нeт зaпиcaнного yчacткa.* Hовый звyк нeвозможно пepeзaпиcaть (cтp. 138). • “i.LINK” CABLE Подключeн кaбeль i.LINK (cтp. 139).* Hовый звyк нeвозможно пepeзaпиcaть. • FULL “Memory Stick” пepeполнeнa (cтp. 180).* • Лeпecток зaщиты от зaпиcи нa “Memory Stick” ycтaновлeн в положeниe LOCK (cтp. 170).* • NO FILE Ha “Memory Stick” нeт зaпиcaнныx нeподвижныx изобpaжeний (cтp. 194).* • NO MEMORY STICK He вcтaвлeнa “Memory Stick” (cтp. 173).* • MEMORY STICK ERROR Дaнныe нa “Memory Stick” повpeждeны (cтp. 173).* • FORMAT ERROR (cтp. 164)* • - DIRECTORY ERROR (cтp. 195)* • COPY INHIBIT Ha лeнтe cодepжaтcя yпpaвляющиe cигнaлы aвтоpcкиx пpaв для зaщиты aвтоpcкиx пpaв нa пpогpaммноe обecпeчeниe (cтp. 211).* • Q Z TAPE END Доcтигнyт конeц лeнты (cтp. 42).* • Q NO TAPE Bcтaвьтe кacceтy (cтp. 20).* * Bы ycлышитe мeлодию или зyммepный cигнaл. **x и cообщeниe отобpaжaютcя поочepeдно.

Using your camcorder abroad Using your camcorder abroad You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz. Your camcorder is a PAL system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback picture on a TV, it must be a PAL system based TV with the AUDIO/VIDEO input jack. The following shows TV colour systems used overseas. PAL system Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, etc.

PAL-N system Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay NTSC system Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. SECAM system Bulgaria, France, Guyana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

Simple setting of clock by time difference You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select WORLD TIME in the menu settings. See page 154 for more information.

Иcпользовaниe Baшeй видeокaмepы зa гpaницeй Bы можeтe иcпользовaть Baшy видeокaмepy в любой cтpaнe или облacти блaгодapя ceтeвомy aдaптepy пepeмeнного токa, пpилaгaeмомy к Baшeй видeокaмepe, котоpый можно иcпользовaть в диaпaзонe от 100 до 240 B пepeмeнного токa c чacтотой 50/60 Гц. Baшa видeокaмepa paботaeт в cиcтeмe PAL. Ecли нeобxодимо пpоcмотpeть воcпpоизводимоe изобpaжeниe нa экpaнe тeлeвизоpa, то это должeн быть тeлeвизоp, paботaющий в cиcтeмe PAL c вxодными гнeздaми AUDIO/VIDEO. Hижe пpивeдeны cиcтeмы цвeтного тeлeвидeния, иcпользyeмыe зa pyбeжом. Cиcтeмa PAL Aвcтpaлия, Aвcтpия, Бeльгия, Китaй, Чeшcкaя Pecпyбликa, Дaния, Финляндия, Гepмaния, Beликобpитaния, Голлaндия, Гонконг, Итaлия, Кyвeйт, Maлaйзия, Hовaя Зeлaндия, Hоpвeгия, Поpтyгaлия, Cингaпyp, Cловaкcкaя Pecпyбликa, Иcпaния, Швeция, Швeйцapия, Taилaнд и т.д. Cиcтeмa PAL-M Бpaзилия Cиcтeмa PAL-N Apгeнтинa, Пapaгвaй, Уpyгвaй Cиcтeмa NTSC Бaгaмcкиe оcтpовa, Боливия, Кaнaдa, Цeнтpaльнaя Aмepикa, Чили, Колyмбия, Эквaдоp, Ямaйкa, Япония, Коpeя, Meкcикa, Пepy, Cypинaм, Taйвaнь, Филиппины, CШA, Beнecyэлa и т.д.

Maintenance information and precautions Moisture condensation If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this condition, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the % indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.

If moisture condensation occurred None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open. Your camcorder can be used again if the % indicator does not appear when the power is turned on again. Note on moisture condensation Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows: •You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating device. •You bring your camcorder from an airconditioned car or room into a hot place outside. •You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower. •You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humidity place. How to prevent moisture condensation When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).

Инфоpмaция по yxодy зa aппapaтом и мepы пpeдоcтоpожноcти Кондeнcaция влaги Ecли видeокaмepa пpинeceнa из xолодного мecтa в тeплоe помeщeниe, то внyтpи видeокaмepы, нa повepxноcти лeнты или нa объeктивe можeт пpоизойти кондeнcaция влaги. B тaком cоcтоянии лeнтa можeт пpилипнyть к бapaбaнy головки и бyдeт повpeждeнa, или жe видeокaмepa нe cможeт paботaть нaдлeжaщим обpaзом. Ecли внyтpи видeокaмepы пpоизошлa кондeнcaция влaги, пpозвyчит звyковой cигнaл и зaмигaeт индикaтоp %. Ecли одновpeмeнно мигaeт индикaтоp Z, это знaчит, что кacceтa вcтaвлeнa в видeокaмepy. Ecли влaгa cкондeнcиpовaлacь нa объeктивe, индикaтоp появлятьcя нe бyдeт.

Maintenance information and precautions Removing Dust from Inside the Viewfinder Before cleaning, remove the sticker below the viewfinder lens adjustment lever. (1) While holding down the hook 1, slide the eyecup in the direction of the arrow and remove it out 2. (2) Clean the surface with a commercially available blower.

Do step 1 above sliding the eyecup in the reverse direction of the arrow.

Повтоpитe шaг 1, опиcaнный вышe, cдвигaя окyляp в нaпpaвлeнии, обpaтном cтpeлкe.

Maintenance information Cleaning the video head To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video head may be dirty when: •mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture. •playback pictures do not move. •playback pictures do not appear. •the x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

If the above problem, [a] or [b] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). Check the picture and if the above problem persists, repeat cleaning.

Cleaning the LCD screen

If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using a LCD Cleaning Cloth (not supplied) to clean the LCD screen.

Ecли нa экpaнe ЖКД появятcя отпeчaтки пaльцeв или пыль, для очиcтки экpaнa ЖКД peкомeндyeтcя иcпользовaть cпeциaльнyю ткaнь (нe вxодит в комплeкт).

Charging the vanadiumlithium battery in your camcorder Your camcorder is supplied with a vanadiumlithium battery installed so as to retain the date and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The vanadium-lithium battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The battery, however, will get discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It will be completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your camcorder at all. Even if the vanadium-lithium battery is not charged, it will not affect the camcorder operation. To retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if the battery is discharged. Charging the vanadium-lithium battery: •Connect your camcorder to mains using the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours. •Or install the fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.

•Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor). •For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in this operating instructions. •If any solid object or liquid get inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further. •Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens. •Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder. •Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so might cause heat to build up inside. •Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration. Noise may appear on the image. •Do not touch the LCD screen with a sharppointed object. •If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD screen. This is not a malfunction. •While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a malfunction.

• Экcплyaтиpyйтe видeокaмepy от 7,2 B (бaтapeйный блок) или 8,4 B (ceтeвой aдaптep пepeмeнного токa) • Что кacaeтcя экcплyaтaции видeокaмepы от поcтоянного и пepeмeнного токa, иcпользyйтe пpинaдлeжноcти, peкомeндyeмыe в дaнной инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции. • Ecли внyтpь коpпyca попaл кaкой-нибyдь твepдый пpeдмeт или жидкоcть, выключитe видeокaмepy и пepeд дaльнeйшeй ee экcплyaтaциeй пpовepьтe ee y дилepa Sony. • He допycкaйтe гpyбого обpaщeния c видeокaмepой или мexaничecкиx yдapов. Бyдьтe оcобeнно оcтоpожны c объeктивом. • Когдa видeокaмepa нe иcпользyeтcя, ycтaновитe пepeключaтeль POWER в положeниe OFF (CHG). • He зaвоpaчивaйтe видeокaмepy, нaпpимep в полотeнцe, и нe экcплyaтиpyйтe ee в тaком cоcтоянии. Это можeт пpивecти к повышeнию тeмпepaтypы внyтpи видeокaмepы. • Дepжитe Baшy видeокaмepy подaльшe от cильныx мaгнитныx полeй и нe подвepгaйтe ee мexaничecкой вибpaции. Ha изобpaжeнии могyт возникнyть помexи. • He пpикacaйтecь к экpaнy ЖКД оcтpыми пpeдмeтaми. • Пpи экcплyaтaции Baшeй видeокaмepы в xолодном мecтe, нa экpaнe ЖКД можeт появлятьcя оcтaточноe изобpaжeниe. Oднaко это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью. • Пpи экcплyaтaции Baшeй видeокaмepы, зaдняя cтоpонa экpaнa ЖКД можeт нaгpeвaтьcя. Oднaко это нe являeтcя нeиcпpaвноcтью.

On handling tapes •Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out. •Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape. •Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with a soft cloth.

•Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is not to be used for a long time. •Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens, remove them with a soft cloth. •Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the finish. •Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.

• Когдa видeокaмepa в тeчeниe длитeльного вpeмeни нe иcпользyeтcя, вынимaйтe кacceтy и пepиодичecки включaйтe питaниe, дaйтe кaмepe поpaботaть в peжимe CAMERA и VCR, включaя воcпpоизвeдeниe кacceты пpимepно нa тpи минyты. • Чиcтитe объeктив c помощью мягкой киcточки для yдaлeния пыли. Ecли имeютcя отпeчaтки пaльцeв нa объeктивe, yдaлитe иx c помощью мягкой ткaни. • Чиcтитe коpпyc видeокaмepы c помощью мягкой cyxой ткaни или мягкой ткaни, cлeгкa cмочeнной cлaбым pacтвоpом моющeго cpeдcтвa. He иcпользyйтe никaкиe pacтвоpитeли, котоpыe могyт повpeдить покpытиe. • He допycкaйтe попaдaния пecкa в видeокaмepy. Ecли Bы иcпользyeтe видeокaмepy нa пecчaном пляжe или в кaком-либо пыльном мecтe, пpeдоxpaняйтe aппapaт от пecкa или пыли. Пecок или пыль могyт пpивecти к нeиcпpaвноcти aппapaтa, котоpaя иногдa можeт быть нeycтpaнимой.

AC power adaptor •Unplug the unit from the mains when you are not using the unit for a long time. To disconnect the mains lead, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the mains lead itself. •Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or damaged. •Do not bend the mains lead forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage the lead and may cause fire or electrical shock. •Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged. •Always keep metal contacts clean. •Do not disassemble the unit. •Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.

•While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and video operation. •The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction. •Do not place the unit in locations that are: – Extremely hot or cold – Dusty or dirty – Very humid – Vibrating

•Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function. •To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the battery terminals. •Keep the battery pack away from fire. •Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60 °C (140 °F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight. •Keep the battery pack dry. •Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock. •Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack. •Attach the battery pack to video equipment securely. •Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity. •The battery pack is not resistant to water. Do not wet the battery pack. •Unless you use the battery pack for a long period, store the battery pack after you charge it fully and use it completely once a year. •Store the battery pack in a cool, dry place.

Maintenance information and precautions

Notes on dry batteries

To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following: •Be sure to insert the batteries with the + – polarities matched to the + – marks. •Dry batteries are not rechargeable. •Do not use a combination of new and old batteries. •Do not use different types of batteries. •Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time. •Do not use leaking batteries.

Bо избeжaниe возможного повpeждeния видeокaмepы вcлeдcтвиe yтeчки внyтpeннeго вeщecтвa бaтapeeк или коppозии cоблюдaйтe cлeдyющee: • Пpи ycтaновкe бaтapeeк cоблюдaйтe пpaвильнyю поляpноcть + – в cоотвeтcтвии c мeткaми + –. • Cyxиe бaтapeйки нeльзя пepeзapяжaть. • He иcпользyйтe новыe бaтapeйки вмecтe cо cтapыми. • He иcпользyйтe бaтapeйки paзного типa. • Ecли бaтapeйки нe иcпользyютcя длитeльноe вpeмя, они поcтeпeнно paзpяжaютcя. • He иcпользyйтe бaтapeйки, котоpыe потeкли.

If batteries are leaking •Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries. •If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water. •If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a doctor. If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.

Specifications Video camera recorder System

Input/Output connectors S video input/output Input/output auto switch 4-pin mini DIN Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced Chrominance signal: 0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced Video input/output Input/output auto switch RCA pin-jack, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms,

LCD screen Picture 2.5 type measured diagonally 49.9 × 37.3 mm (2 × 1 1/2 in) Total dot number 200 640 (880 × 228) General Power requirements 7.2 V (battery pack) 8.4 V (AC power adaptor) Average power consumption (when using the battery pack) During camera recording using LCD 4.1 W Viewfinder 4.0 W Operating temperature 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) Storage temperature –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F) Dimensions (approx.) 115 × 146 × 342 mm (4 5/8 × 5 3/4 × 13 1/2 in) (w/h/d) Mass (approx.) 1.4 kg (3 lb 1 oz) main unit only 1.6 kg (3 lb 8 oz) including the battery pack, NP-F330, cassette DVM60 and hood cap Supplied accessories See page 5.

Power consumption 23 W Output voltage DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the operating mode Operating temperature 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) Storage temperature –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F) Dimensions (approx.) 125 × 39 × 62 mm (5 × 1 9/16 × 2 1/2 in) (w/h/d) excluding projecting parts Mass (approx.) 280 g (9.8 oz) excluding power cord Cord length (approx.) Mains lead: 2 m (6.6 feet) Connecting cord: 1.6 m (5.2 feet)

Battery pack Output voltage DC 7.2 V Capacity 5.0 Wh Dimensions (approx.) 38.4 × 20.6 × 70.8 mm (1 9/16 × 13/16 × 2 7/8 in) (w/h/d) Mass (approx.) 70 g (2.5 oz) Type Lithium ion

“Memory Stick” Memory Flash memory 4 MB: MSA-4A Operating voltage 2.7 V -3.6 V Power consumption Approx. 45 mA in the operating mode Approx. 130 µA in the standby mode Dimensions (approx.) 50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm (2 × 1/8 × 7/8 in) (w/h/d) Mass (approx.) 4 g (0.14 oz)

Additional Information / Дополнитeльнaя инфоpмaция

Video recording system 2 rotary heads Helical scanning system Audio recording system Rotary heads, PCM system Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz, stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits (Fs48 kHz, stereo) Video signal PAL colour, CCIR standards Usable cassette Mini DV cassette with the mark printed Tape speed SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s Recording/playback time (using cassette DVM60) SP: 1 h LP: 1.5 h Fast-forward/rewind time (using cassette DVM60) Approx. 2 min and 30 s Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (colour) Image device 1/3 type CCD (3 Charge Coupled Device) Approx. 450 000 pixels (Effective: Approx. 400 000 pixels) Lens Combined power zoom lens Filter diameter 58 mm (2 3/8 in) 12× (Optical), 48× (Digital) F1.6 - 2.4 Focal length 6 - 72 mm (1/4 - 2 7/8 in) When converted to a 35 mm still camera 43.2 - 518.4 mm (1 3/4 - 20 1/2 in) Colour temperature Auto, nIndoor (3 200 K), Outdoor (5 800 K), Minimum illumination 2 lux (F1.6)

unbalanced, sync negative Audio input/output Input/output auto switch RCA pin-jack, 327 mV, (at output impedance more than 47 kilohms) Output impedance with less than 2.2 kilohms Input impedance more than 47 kilohms Headphones jack Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm) LANC control jack Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm) MIC jack Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output impedance 6.8 kilohms (ø 3.5 mm) Stereo type DV input/output 4-pin connector Speaker Dynamic speaker (ø 20 mm)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Identifying the parts and controls

Identifying the parts and controls This mark indicates that this product is a genuine accessory for Sony video products. When purchasing Sony video products, Sony recommends that you purchase accessories with this “GENUINE VIDEO ACCESSORIES” mark.

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов Дaннaя мeткa ознaчaeт, что это издeлиe являeтcя подлинной пpинaдлeжноcтью для видeоaппapaтypы Sony. Пpи покyпкe видeоaппapaтypы Sony peкомeндyeтcя пpиобpeтaть для нee пpинaдлeжноcти Sony c мeткой “GENUINE VIDEO ACCESSORIES”.

These are trademarks. Это тоpговыe мapки. Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe •The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video light or microphone. •The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the accessory for further information. •The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten the screw. •To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the accessory.

Пpимeчaния по дepжaтeлю для вcпомогaтeльныx пpинaдлeжноcтeй • Дepжaтeль для вcпомогaтeльныx пpинaдлeжноcтeй подaeт питaниe нa вcпомогaтeльныe пpинaдлeжноcти, тaкиe кaк видeоподcвeткa или микpофон. • Дepжaтeль для вcпомогaтeльныx пpинaдлeжноcтeй cоeдинeн c пepeключaтeлeм POWER, что позволяeт включaть и выключaть подaвaeмоe нa дepжaтeль питaниe. Подpобныe cвeдeния пpиводятcя в инcтpyкции по экcплyaтaции вcпомогaтeльныx пpинaдлeжноcтeй. • B дepжaтeлe для вcпомогaтeльныx пpинaдлeжноcтeй имeeтcя пpeдоxpaнитeльноe ycтpойcтво для нaдeжной фикcaции ycтaновлeнной пpинaдлeжноcти. Для подcоeдинeния пpинaдлeжноcти нaжмитe ee вниз до yпоpa, a зaтeм зaтянитe винт. • Для cнятия пpинaдлeжноcти оcлaбьтe винт, a зaтeм нaжмитe пpинaдлeжноcть вниз и потянитe ee.

Identifying the parts and controls

qj LCD screen (p. 25)

(self-timer) button (p. 34, 48, 181)

Identifying the parts and controls

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

wh Battery pack (p. 13)

ek el r; ra eg Video control buttons (p. 38, 42, 121) C SLOW (slow playback) AUDIO DUB (dubbing) x STOP (stop) m REW (rewind) N PLAY (playback) M FF (Fast-forward) X PAUSE (pause) z REC (recording) The control buttons light up when you set the POWER switch to VCR. eh Remote sensor/infrared ray emitter ej Camera recording lamp (p. 22)

eg Кнопки видeоконтpоля (cтp. 38, 42, 121) C SLOW (зaмeдлeнноe воcпpоизвeдeниe) AUDIO DUB (пepeзaпиcь) x STOP (оcтaновкa) m REW (ycкоpeннaя пepeмоткa нaзaд) N PLAY (воcпpоизвeдeниe) M FF ((ycкоpeннaя пepeмоткa впepeд) X PAUSE (пayзa) z REC (зaпиcь) Кнопки yпpaвлeния подcвeчивaютcя, ecли пepeключaтeль POWER ycтaновлeн в положeниe VCR. eh Диcтaнционный ceнcоp/ инфpaкpacный излyчaтeль ej Лaмпочкa зaпиcи видeокaмepой (cтp. 22)

Identifying the parts and controls

r; Lens hood fixing screw ra Lens hood You can attach a wide teleconversion lens (not supplied) by removing the lens hood. Removing the lens hood To remove the lens hood for attachment of the wide teleconversion lens, etc., loosen the lens hood fixing screw, and unscrew the lens hood conuterclockwise. When using additional filters We recommend that you use Sony made filters having the genuine accessory mark.

Notes on replacing the eyecup •When replacing the supplied eyecup (large or small), clutch the upper and lower of it by your fingers [a], insert your finger into the unfasten portion between the eyecup and viewfinder [b], then remove it. •Do not pull the eyecup inward or with excessive force [c]. Doing so may damage the eyecup.

r; Bинт для фикcaции блeнды объeктивa

Identifying the parts and controls

rs Hooks for shoulder strap

Identifying the parts and controls

Attaching the shoulder strap Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder strap.

Пpикpeплeниe плeчeвого peмня Пpикpeпитe плeчeвой peмeнь, пpилaгaeмый к Baшeй видeокaмepe, к кpючкaм для плeчeвого peмня.

Quick Reference / Oпepaтивный cпpaвочник

Fasten the grip strap firmly.

Identifying the parts and controls

yf Camera recording lamp (p. 22)

u; Tripod receptacle Make sure that the length of the tripod screw is less than 6.5 mm (9/32 inch). Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod securely and the screw may damage your camcorder. ua Intelligent accessory shoe us MIC/LINE switch (p. 135)

yl Гнeздо DC IN (cтp. 14) u; Гнeздо для штaтивa Убeдитecь, что длинa винтa штaтивa нe пpeвышaeт 6,5 мм. B пpотивном cлyчae Bы нe cможeтe нaдeжно пpикpeпить штaтив, a винт можeт повpeдить видeокaмepy. ua Дepжaтeль для вcпомогaтeльныx пpинaдлeжноcтeй us Пepeключaтeль MIC/LINE (cтp. 135)

Identifying the parts and controls

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

ud MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (p. 135) The MIC jack is used to supply the power to the “plug-in-power” microphone connected, and is used as an audio input jack for an external microphone or audio equipment. When connecting an external microphone, set the MIC/LINE switch to MIC, and when connecting audio equipment, set it to LINE.

DV IN/OUT jack (p. 107, 130, 190) This “i.LINK” mark is a trademark of Sony Corporation and indicates that this product is in agreement with IEEE 13941995 specifications and their revisions.

LANC jack LANC stands for Local Application Control Bus System. The LANC control jack is used for controlling the tape transport of video equipment and peripherals connected to it. This jack has the same function as the jack indicated as CONTROL L or REMOTE.

i; i (headphones) jack When you use headphones, the speaker on your camcorder is silent.

uj Гнeздо AUDIO L/R (cтp. 44, 105, 128, 135) uk Гнeздо DV IN/OUT (cтp. 107, 130, 190) Знaк “i.LINK” являeтcя тоpговой мapкой коpпоpaции Sony и yкaзывaeт нa то, что пpодyкция cоотвeтcтвyeт тexничecким ycловиям cтaндapтов IEEE 1394-1995 и иx дополнeниям. Гнeздо DV IN/OUT cовмecтимо c кaнaлом пepeдaчи cигнaлов i.LINK. ul Гнeздо LANC LANC обознaчaeт cиcтeмy кaнaлa мecтного yпpaвлeния. Гнeздо yпpaвлeния LANC иcпользyeтcя для контpоля зa пepeмeщeниeм лeнты видeоaппapaтypы и подключeнныx к нeй пepифepийныx ycтpойcтв. Дaнноe гнeздо имeeт тaкyю жe фyнкцию, кaк и paзъeмы, обознaчeнныe CONTROL L или REMOTE.

Quick Reference / Oпepaтивный cпpaвочник

The DV IN/OUT jack is i.LINK compatible.

i; Гнeздо i (головныe тeлeфоны) Ecли иcпользyютcя головныe тeлeфоны, гpомкоговоpитeль нa видeокaмepe отключaeтcя.

Identifying the parts and controls Remote Commander The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.

1 Transmitter Point toward the remote sensor to control your camcorder after turning on your camcorder.

Identifying the parts and controls

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

To prepare the Remote Commander

Для подготовки пyльтa диcтaнционного yпpaвлeния

Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries by matching the + and – polarities on the batteries to the + – marks inside the battery compartment.

Notes on the Remote Commander •Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly. •Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper.

Bcтaвьтe двe бaтapeйки R6 (paзмepa AA), cоблюдaя поляpноcть + и – cо знaкaми + – внyтpи отceкa для бaтapeeк.

2 1 1 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 14)/Tape counter (p. 91)/Memory counter (p. 194)/Time code indicator (p. 31)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 222) 2 FULL charge indicator (p. 14) 3 Remianing battery indicator (p. 14)

3 1 Индикaтоp оcтaвшeгоcя зapядa бaтapeйного блокa (cтp. 14)/Cчeтчик лeнты (cтp. 91)/Cчeтчик пaмяти (cтp. 194)/Индикaтоp кодa вpeмeни (cтp. 31)/Индикaтоp caмодиaгноcтики (cтp. 229) 2 Индикaтоp зapядки FULL (cтp. 14) 3 Индикaтоp оcтaвшeгоcя зapядa (cтp. 14)

Identifying the parts and controls

Oбознaчeниe чacтeй и peгyлятоpов

Operation indicators

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 qa qs qd qf qg

1 2 0 min W T ST I L L

Identifying the parts and controls

Quick Function Guide Functions to adjust exposure (in the recording mode) •In insufficient light •In dark environments such as sunset, fireworks, or general night views •Shooting backlit subjects •In spotlight, such as at the theater or a formal event

Low lux mode (p. 77) Sunset & moon mode (p. 77) BACK LIGHT (p. 32) SPOT LIGHT (p. 33)

Functions to give images more impact (in the recording mode) •Smooth transition between scenes •Taking a still picture •Digital processing of images •Superimposing a title

FADER (p. 54) PHOTO (p. 46, 177) PICTURE EFFECT (p. 56)/DIGITAL EFFECT (p. 58) TITLE (p. 141)

Functions to give a natural appearance to your recordings (in the recording mode) •Preventing deterioration of picture quality in digital zoom •Focusing manually •Recording fast-moving subjects

D ZOOM [MENU] (p. 154) Manual focus (p. 81) Sports lesson mode (p. 77)

Functions to be used in editing (in the recording mode) •Watching the picture on a wide-screen TV •Viewing images using a personal computer

Wide mode (p. 53) “Memory Stick” (p. 170)

Functions to be used after recording (in the playback mode) •Digital processing of recorded images

PICTURE EFFECT (p. 102)/DIGITAL EFFECT (p. 103) •Displaying the date/time or various settings when you Data code (p. 40) recorded •Quickly locating a desired scene Zero set memory (p. 91) •Searching for scenes having a title Title search (p. 95) •Searching for scenes recorded in the photo mode Photo search (p. 99) •Scanning scenes recorded in the photo mode Photo scan (p. 101) •Playing back monaural sound or sub sound HiFi SOUND [MENU] (p. 154)

Index A, B A/V connecting cable 44, 105, 128 AC power adaptor 14 Adjusting shutter speed 64 Adjusting viewfinder 28 AE SHIFT 75 Audio dubbing 135 AUDIO LEVEL 73 AUDIO MIX 157 Audio mode 159 AUTO SHTR 156 BACK LIGHT 32 Battery pack 13 BEEP 161

C, D Camera chromakey 182 Cassette memory 10, 210 Charging battery 14 Charging vanadium-lithium battery 236 COLOUR BAR 161 Connection (dubbing a tape) 105 (viewing on TV) 44 Continuous 178 Custom preset 75 Cut recording 87 Data code 40 Date search 97 Date/time indicator 41 DEMO 160 DIGITAL EFFECT 58 Digital program editing .... 108 DISPLAY 39 DOT 54 Dual sound track tape 212 Dubbing a tape 105 DV connecting cable 106

E EDITSEARCH 36 END SEARCH 36, 43 Exposure 62 External microphone (not supplied) 251

F, G, H Fade in/out 54 FADER 54 FLASH MOTION 58 FOCUS 81 Format 158 Full charge 14

Printed on recycled paper